My menu

Sections Archive

Activity types

Return to Constructing learning

A. The intention is to..

…introduce you to or remind you of descriptions of different groups/types of learning activities, and to invite you to reflect on the types of activities that you routinely organise for your students. The different activity types are ordered to illustrate increasing levels of learner independence.

B. The best way of tackling this is to..

…read through the descriptions of activity types, thinking about which activity types you tend to favour in your own planning.

While this looks like a relatively quick and interesting read it’s packed with information you may not have come across in this form previously. It’s a section you may want to return to for reminders again and again.

C. As a result it should have the following impact.

You will have a heightened awareness of the activities you tend to gravitate to, and an understanding of how you might broaden your repertoire.

Activity design categories

Types of Activities

All teachers design activities to help their students to access and understand the content of the lesson. These activities lie at the heart of lesson planning, linking what is to be learned with how it will be learned. While it is impossible to list all such activities, is it possible to discern some different types of activities, to identify some overarching categories or groups of activities?

Here we try to suggest a hierarchy of activity types, going from ‘Listening’, through to ‘Discovery’. This progression of activities: demands more of students; activates a wider/richer range of learning behaviours; and is underpinned by a shift of responsibility from the teacher towards the learner.

As you read through this section, think of the activities that you plan for your students and ask yourself which activity types you tend to favour. Also consider how you might adapt/tweak your usual activity types to offer students greater responsibility for their own learning.

 

 

 

Activity Type – ‘Listening’

The characteristics of a ‘Listening’ type activity are that:

  • the outcomes, success criteria and content known to the teacher;
  • students learn by listening to teacher exposition.

Essentially a relatively passive experience for learners unless the teacher overlays an activity that requires students to do more than simply listen. Nonetheless the fact that the activity is rooted in the exposition of ‘an expert’ (this ‘expert’ could be the teacher, or a U tube clip, or some other source of ‘expertise’) means that levels of learner independence are limited and the classroom culture is heavily teacher-focused.

This is not necessarily a bad thing – there are occasions when teachers must tell students ‘stuff’, and this is particularly the case when students would have no way of discovering the information for themselves. Used sparingly and only when necessary it is a valuable tool in the teacher’s arsenal, but used excessively or when not necessary it reduces students to being spectators rather than participators.

 

 

 

Activity Type – ‘Practising’

The characteristics of a ‘Practising’ type activity are that:

  • the outcome, success criteria and content are known to learners;
  • students engage in rehearsal or reinforcement or retrieval of content/skill.

Strategies might include: Past papers; Practice tests; Multiple choice tests; Quizzes; Writing an essay; Answering a spoken question; Testing yourself on your notes / flash cards; Creating (and answering) your own questions; Testing others and/or being tested by others.

Used for consolidation rather than new learning, ‘Practising’ is about helping students to struggle to recall something. When we struggle to remember something, it primes our brain to remember it more easily the next time we look. The brain gets the message that this memory must be important because we are looking for it. The more times we try and retrieve something, the stronger the memory gets. But it is the struggle that is important. If we reteach content instead of getting students to try and retrieve stuff they’ve probably forgotten, the memory does not get strengthened in the same way. It seems kinder but actually does students no favours.

The retrieval effect is stronger if we allow a bit of forgetting to happen before getting students to retrieve. Memories get stronger once retrieved if we have had time to forget them – bizarre as that sounds. Hence the need to spread such activities out into future lessons, spaced learning as it is sometimes called.

 

 

 

 

Activity Type – ‘Manipulating’

The characteristics of a ‘Manipulating’ type activity are that:

  • students are given all of the information to work with;
  • students have to manipulate the information by organising / sorting / ranking / sequencing.

Students begin ‘Manipulating’ type activities having been given all of the necessary information, usually broken up into smaller pieces. The task is to make sense of these pieces and to re-build the whole. Re-building may require students to: sequence the information (a story or poem or historical events etc.); rank the information using some agreed criteria (Ranking); sort any information with an underlying pattern that can be discerned or created.

For more ideas, there are a number of ‘Manipulating’ type activities in The Teachers’ Toolkit (by Paul Ginnis), including ‘Ranking’.

View Ranking

 

Activity Type – ‘Assembling’

The characteristics of an ‘Assembling’ type activity are that:

  • the information is given but is hidden / obscured;
  • students have to sort the information, judge its relevance, and make sense of it for themselves.

Like ‘Manipulating’ in some ways, ‘Assembling’ differs in that although all the information is provided, it is obscured and students need to make judgements about its importance / relevance. It is this need for a critical appraisal of the information provided that sets ‘Assembling’ apart from ‘Manipulating’.

Consider the example given opposite – building a credible account from a range of sometimes conflicting eye witness statements. Remove all of the conflicting or possibly biased statements and the task is reduced to synthesising similar statements into a credible account. No need to think critically about the statements, just create a summary. The effect is to reduce an ‘Assembling’ type task into a ‘Manipulating’ task.

‘Murder Hunt’ (see below) is an ‘Assembling’ activity because students need to identify and eliminate all of the irrelevant information and red herrings. Remove the irrelevant information in advance and it becomes a ‘Manipulating’ activity, organising the relevant clues without the need to think critically about their relevance.

Likewise, a ‘Manipulating’ activity can be turned into an ‘Assembling’ activity with a few tweaks. In its ‘Manipulating’ format, Tin Tin is little more than a jigsaw puzzle. But – adding a couple of pieces from a similar but different Tin Tin cartoon, or even removing a couple of key pieces and inviting students to create their own replacements, introduces the need for a more critical, ‘Assembling’ type approach.

For more ideas, there are a number of ‘Assembling’ type activities in The Teachers’ Toolkit (by Paul Ginnis), including ‘Murder Hunt’.

View Murder Hunt

 

 

 

Activity Type – ‘Finding – Enquiry’

The characteristics of an ‘Enquiry’ type activity are that:

  • the outcome is known, success criteria are known, content is known, but the method is unknown;
  • students determine their method for themselves.

The ‘Rock Salt’ activity was planned by a teacher in Glasgow who was exploring how he could give more control to his students. Read more about it and the impact it had on both himself and his students in the toggle below.

Read about this 'Enquiry' type activity ⬇️

What price control? How one school is starting to do things differently.

One of our consultants was working recently with a school that provides education for secondary aged children with social, emotional and behavioural needs, on full and part time placements. Additionally it offers support for primary aged pupils on a similar basis. They had undertaken a couple of days training, and the 12 teachers were set the challenge of undertaking a learning enquiry.

Typically such an enquiry is conducted in an area of interest for the individual teacher, and might be along the lines of:

‘If I assign roles to individuals before starting group work, will their inclination to engage purposefully with each other improve?’ or ‘If I stop repeating myself, will their listening skills improve?’ etc.

Notice that the teacher makes a conscious decision to change one of their existing teaching behaviours and monitors the impact that this has on their students.

The third day began with all 12 feeding back on their enquiries and the impact on their students. The feedback was fascinating in that all teachers had devised, quite independently, an enquiry that required students to take a greater responsibility for themselves as learners.

A science teacher described one of the enquiries thus:

“I’ve got my kids to do the experiment where they make salt from rock salt for years. Thus far I would tell them all they need to know to be successful, demonstrate the experiment to the whole class, and then ask them to repeat the experiment exactly as I had done it. It gave me control, took care of safety issues, and was as boring as it can get! Why, if you have just seen someone else do the experiment, would anyone be motivated to repeat it for themselves?

I explored my rationale for teaching in this way, and realised that, control aside, I believed that it enabled me to ‘deliver the course’, to ‘make sure’ they all had the revision notes they need, and to ‘convince myself’ that I had taught it well so that they simply must have learned it well. On reflection, this strategy was failing on all counts. Either I would have to re-double my efforts and ‘teach’ even more/better, or maybe there was another way . . . .

With trepidation, I went in with a lump of rock salt and a bowl of salt, and set them the challenge ‘I want you to find out how to make this (salt) from that (rock salt)’. I then sat down, refused to answer any further questions or offer guidance – and it was agony for someone so used to being the font of information in the classroom!

(I admit to making a couple of interventions relating to the safe use of Bunsen burners, but that aside I just let them get on with it.)

What a revelation! They all devised ways to make salt; they discovered the science behind it; they needed minimal external control; and I got a bit of a rest.

The students reported increased enjoyment levels, I reported reduced stress levels, and tests revealed a deeper scientific understanding than was previously the case.

My kids are challenging and frequently disruptive, so much so that mainstream schooling cannot handle them. How amazing that I gained more control and they achieved deeper learning when I stopped teaching for control and started letting them learn.

I realised that these kids need challenge and engagement, not control and instruction. I was afraid this change of approach would slow content learning down, but I was wrong. The learning was deeper and faster because they had done it for themselves, rather than observed it through the eyes of a science teacher. My kids were being scientists, not learning science.”

The room erupted with similar stories of potentially difficult students rising to challenge and ‘doing it for themselves’. One teacher commented “We never really believed our students could do this, but we were wrong!”

When asked what the common threads were through all of their enquiries, one teacher simply said “student power – give them responsibility and they will rise to it”.

 

Ask yourself what a comparable enquiry type activity in your own classroom might look like. What might be holding you back from giving it a go, or from using an activity of this type more frequently?

 

 

Activity Type – ‘Finding – Discovery’

The characteristics of a ‘Discovery’ type activity are that:

  • the outcomes are unknown, the success criteria are unknown, the content is unknown, or at most loosely defined;
  • students determine their own intended outcomes, success criteria, content and method for themselves.

Designing ‘wild tasks’.

Much of the time, classrooms are structured to ‘deliver’ the curriculum. Tasks are carefully designed by teachers to ensure that every child gets their pre-determined dose of curriculum content, content that can be assessed so that progress can be evidenced. But what if we occasionally design tasks that are ‘wild’, that have no pre-determined outcomes, that give learners free rein to explore areas of their own interest?

Begin by asking students to identify questions to which they would like to know the answer – as one school calls them, ‘big awe and wonder questions’. You may choose to sift them so that everyone chooses from a range of questions that the class consider of greatest interest rather than allow complete freedom of choice. Students then design and undertake their own enquiry into their preferred area of interest as a home learning project. Agreed, you could not operate like this all of the time (or could you??!!), but once in a while? What could possibly go wrong? What might the benefits be?

 

Survey your curriculum for task types

Take a look at a unit of work you have taught recently or are about to. Use this task type wheel to try and estimate how much use you make of these different types of tasks.

If your results show mainly listening and practising how might you start thinking more widely?

 

Recapping this section on Activity Types

The materials in this section concentrated on the stages before actually teaching i.e. designing learning activities to support content learning.

Think about:

  • how the different task types would suit your students as learners
  • which task types of curriculum planning ideas are realistic both for you and your students
  • how the ideas would impact on your planning and classroom culture
  • which ideas are front runners for you and why?

Use this decision making pentagon in deciding what to do you might try.

Note down a couple of:

  • things you want to start doing
  • things you think you need to stop doing (that’s harder)
  • things you want to keep doing
  • things you want to do more often
  • things you want to do less
Return to Constructing learning
Continue Reading

Celebrating Learning

Return to ‘the professional learning power game route map’Relating for LearningTalking for LearningConstructing LearningCelebrating Learning

Practical ways to grow your practice in growing learning habits

STAGE 1 Introduce four key learning behaviours.

I’m aware of my learners’ strengths and weaknesses in key learning behaviours. I intentionally offer opportunities to experience and explore how to deal with failure. Classroom displays support the ‘how’ of learning growth and ‘failure’ is now used positively as something we can learn from.

As a result, all my students feel comfortable in my classroom, understand how they are improving in key learning behaviours and remain optimistic when faced with difficulty.

1.1. Introduce students to becoming aware of using learning behaviours.

Students’ learning profiles made me realise how students benefit from or are limited by their use of learning behaviours. I observe the effects of introducing four learning behaviours and use this knowledge to shape my classroom practice.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

You are at the very beginning of your journey of building your students’ learning power. Before doing anything in your teaching you looked at your students through a very different lens. You considered a wide range of their learning behaviours and plotted your thinking as a learning profile for each student. Through these initial practical observations of students you’ve recognised just how powerful learning profiles could be in helping both you and your students make better use of learning capacities and become better learners.

After undertaking this basic research you can begin the job of introducing your students to maybe just one of their capacities, which, when used well will help them become a better learner. By far the most popular starting point is Perseverance.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 materials and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme.

A key first job.

Interpret individual student profiles

When completed the learning behaviour profiles for each of your students will look something like the one to the right – some cells identified as ‘this is a secure skill / behaviour’ with others left blank. (Here the ‘secure’ cells are coloured pink).

[You may even have some of the grey ‘Lacks’ cells coloured in where there are no secure positive behaviours. Where the ‘Lacks’ stage is not coloured in, it indicates that the student no longer behaves in this negative way.]

Ultimately you need to be able to answer the question:

What is this profile telling me about this student?

Explore each student profile and ask yourself:

  • Which behaviours appear relatively weaker/stronger? Well developed, hardly started?
  • Which behaviours appear to explain why this student is successful / unsuccessful, effective/ineffective?
  • Which is the weakest domain for this student (emotional, cognitive, social, strategic)?
  • How might I help this student to help themselves to become a more effective learner?

Learning profiles were explored in Phase 1, Playing the Learning Power Game v7, Unit 1, Section 1E4.

What does this profile tell me?

 

Further Teaching Ideas

Go back to Playing the Learning Power Game, section 1E5 and 1E6. Here you are encouraged to move on from considering individual student profiles to seeking patterns of behaviour across different subgroups of students. It is a vital step in coming to understand the learning behaviours of your class / key stage / school.

Click here to revisit sections 1E4/5/6

1.2. Introduce ways to be confident about learning.

I give students opportunities to experience failure as an essential part of learning. I emphasise and promote being stuck as an interesting place to be and encourage the effective use of learning resources.

20160216-2016-02-16 11.49.34

More detail...

What’s happening here?

You have learned that students have to understand ‘being stuck’ or making mistakes as perfectly normal, acceptable or even interesting places to be…somewhere where they might uncover something new or learn more about themselves. It’s important to stop mistakes or being stuck being experienced as negative indicators of ‘ability’. Instead of avoiding the risk of making mistakes you want your students to give something a go. When that happens, research tells us, perseverance goes up.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 of the programme and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme.

A key teaching strategy

Give mistakes high status, a key role in learning

  • Say that you expect students to make, for example, 3 in a lesson. If they haven’t made the quota of mistakes they are to ask for harder work
  • Make a ‘Mistakes of the Week’ display.
  • identify Good mistakes – as misconceptions and discuss them
  • Offer a range of examples of good mistakes as lesson starters for students to find and discuss.
  • Model making mistakes and how you learn from them.

The idea of how students react to mistakes was introduced in Playing the Learning Power Game and is explored further in the Perseverance module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

20160216-2016-02-16 11.49.34

Further Teaching Ideas

Differentiate between learning time and performance time

This cultural shift is THE essential aspect of friendly classroom cultures. We can do no better than suggest you watch this video by way of explanation.

This Ted Talk was introduced in phase 1 Playing the Learning Power Game and is explored in depth in the phase 2 Listening module, section 3.

The idea of building challenge was introduced in Playing the Learning Power Game and is also in the Perseverance module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

1.3. Introduce wall displays to support the ‘how’ of learning.

I use a variety of displays to support what we are discovering about learning. Displays might include; Stuck prompts, Curiosity corner, ‘Smart’ mistakes, Rights and Responsibilities of learners.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

In these early stages of building students’ learning power classroom walls become vibrant places where the messages, the philosophy, the ‘how to’ ideas, the stages of growth etc. all find a space and echo the culture of learning power loud and clear. You will always know when you’ve walked into a learning powered classroom.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 materials and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme.

A key teaching strategy

Stuck Posters.

Work with students to find useful questions for them to ask themselves and helpful strategies which they might take when they are stuck. Ensure that there are plenty of options that come higher on the list than “Ask the teacher”. Create displays as reminders.

Here is an example generated by a year 7 class.

So called Stuck posters or prompts come in various shapes and sizes, but essentially they are simply home-made lists of what students can try when they get stuck with their learning.

To begin with, the teacher trains the students to make use of this information by greeting every request for prompting with; ‘Have you looked at the poster?’ After a while, looking at the poster becomes routine, and eventually, when the habit of self-unsticking becomes second nature, even the poster becomes redundant. It does not take long, in such a classroom, before ‘Ask the teacher’ becomes a last-ditch strategy, to be engaged only when all else has failed.

The idea of the Stuck Poster is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of using Noticing to stimulate curiosity and celebrating Noticing is introduced in the Noticing module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

4F4847F9-C825-45D1-9C15-1875E7098636

The idea learning detectives is introduced in the Noticing module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

 

STAGE 2 Add a broader range of learning behaviours.

I encourage learners to use an ever growing range of key behaviours more frequently in more contexts. My classroom displays help learners to understand where and why they become stuck and ways of grappling with a task.

As a result, my students show signs of improving in a growing range of learning behaviours and believe that their efforts will pay off.

2.1. Support the learning growth of a broader range of learning behaviours.

I enable, encourage and monitor the growth of students’ use of a broadening range of learning behaviours covering thinking, feeling, relating and managing learning as called for by the curriculum.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

This stage represents a big leap forward because now you’re beginning to add more learning behaviours into the mix. Firstly you are just keeping an eye on what effect adding a new learning behaviour seems to have on students. But as you add more behaviours to the mix it’s really important to ensure you stay true to the basics of a learning culture. Make yourself a list of key characteristics and check it out from time to time as you add more learning behaviours to the mix. Later you could ask …what beneficial effect is adding planning, for example, having on your students’ learning?

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 materials and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme.

A key teaching strategy

Spot whether the key features remain alive and well in your learning culture.

  • Stuck Prompts now developed by students and displayed around the classroom
  • Active use of The Learning Pit
  • During lessons students post up their problems and other students suggest solutions
  • You encourage students to think about why they are stuck
  • You praise the effort, not the ‘ability
  • You praise the process not the outcome;
  • You praise in specifics of learning behaviours, not generalities;
  • Work in progress is displayed
  • You’ve explored the meaning of effort
  • You display new learning that comes from mistakes
  • You show students how to free up working memory
  • You differentiate between learning and performance zones

These ideas were introduced in Phase 1 Playing the Learning Power Game v7, Unit 3 Constructing Learning, Section 3D, Activity Catalogue, Perseverance Checkers.

Further Teaching Ideas

Similar ideas are introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple, and developed in ii) and iii).

A strategy to activate a wide range of learning behaviours is introduced in the Reasoning module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

Screen Shot 2016-08-16 at 12.02.09

 

2.2. Broaden re-defining failure across more learning behaviours.

I encourage students to work out why things seem to be going wrong or why they are stuck. I engage them in the process of finding a way through and modify classroom language to emphasise making an effort over achievement.

Image result for because

More detail...

What’s happening here?

As part of your strategy to re-define failure you are putting more emphasis on students finding their own way through with minimal help from yourself. This of course only works when ‘being wrong or stuck’ is seen as an interesting not shameful place to be.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 of the programme and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme

A key teaching strategy

From ‘I’m stuck ‘ To ‘I’m stuck because …

When a student says ‘I’m stuck’, resist the temptation to ask ‘what are you stuck on?’ – you know only too well they will probably reply ‘everything’. Better to explore ‘why’ they are stuck . . . .

Encourage students to identify the cause of their stuckness. Move students from saying “I’m stuck” to ” I’m stuck because…” Naming the problem will often suggest a reasonable next step.

It’s also useful to insist that students can’t call themselves ‘stuck’ unless they have tried to apply at least 1 solution.

The idea of ‘Stuck because’ is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

Image result for because

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of ‘Stuck of the Week’ and other display suggestions is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

To encourage students to ask their questions, create a Question Wall as introduced in the Questioning module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

another question mark

2.3. Broaden displays to cover the growing range of behaviours in use.

I celebrate our ‘learning to learn’ values through a growing range of displays which may include: Questioning walls; If-Then statements; learning stretch ladders; drafts of work in progress.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

What you put on your walls now has no bounds because you are gradually adding more learning behaviours into the mix. Display now turns more towards the ‘how to’ plan or listen, or the stages of reasoning, or the value of imagining, or the sort of questions to avoid in order to maintain harmonious relationships. Your classroom walls become a treasure trove of learning to learn ideas.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 materials and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme.

A key teaching strategy

Make your classroom question friendly.

Create question walls in the classroom to illustrate and prompt questioning. Display, for example:

  • Student-posted questions about current topics that need resolution.
  • ‘The Question of The Day’.
  • Different types and purposes of questions.
  • Questioning routines that the class have defined.
  • A lexicon of questions for use when exploring and enquiring.
  • A list of questions for use to get started, or unstuck.
  • Annotated student work and pictures to provoke questioning.

 

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of displaying work in progress is introduced in the Revising module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple, and developed further in Purple to Blue.

The idea of exploring question types is introduced in the Questioning module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

postits wall

 

The idea of students sharing their successful learning strategies is introduced in the Capitalising module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue. See also ‘Helpful Habits’ in the same section.

 

STAGE 3 Deepen understanding of the how of learning.

I create, with students, displays that highlight small progression steps in an increasing range of learning behaviours and use a rich learning language derived from progression maps. I encourage students to regard mistakes as valuable learning opportunities.

As a result, my students frequently ask themselves how effectively they are learning and view mistakes as interesting learning opportunities.

3.1. Deepen supporting learning growth.

My learning language and view of students is now enriched by the school’s learning behaviour progression maps. These offer me and students a richer understanding of learning and what getting better looks like.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

Stage 3 is all about deepening the approach across the whole curriculum and really ensuring that students know and can feel when they are improving and making valiant steps in recognising their progress in becoming a stronger learner. This may be proclaimed loudly through wall displays or quietly through discussion and feedback.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 materials and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme.

A key teaching strategy

Give each student a coloured piece of A4 paper on the classroom wall. Attach an envelope to the paper containing a piece of card cut up into five pieces. Each piece of card has a student generated ‘learning how’ goal. For examples:

  • I can take turns in a group.
  • I can explain why I think something.
  • I can listen carefully to what others are saying.
  • I can take my time to notice details.
  • I can look for patterns.
  • I can think ahead and plan what I should do next.
  • I can ignore things that distract me.
  • I can keep calm when I get stuck.
  • I can look for a way of getting unstuck.
  • I can improve something after making a mistake.
  • I can build on other people’s ideas.

When a student achieves a stated behaviour the card is taken out of the envelope and stuck to their piece of paper. The aim is to have all five pieces of card making up a completed jigsaw on the wall in a given time. e.g. a fortnight.

This is an example of public recognition being given to learning behaviour goals.

The idea of building a display showing students’ learning targets is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of celebrating the growth of learning behaviours is introduced in the Questioning module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple, but the ideas can be applied to all learning behaviours.

A strategy for sharpening students’ listening skills is introduced in the Listening module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

Related image

 

3.2. Deepen understanding of re-defining failure.

A rich understanding of how to view, avoid or recalculate failure informs practice. Mistakes are seen as valuable learning opportunities, feedback concentrates on what was right and why, more than on what was incorrect. Students have strategies for spotting mistakes.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

You introduced these ideas some time ago, possibly as long as 18 months to 2 years but it’s always a good idea to bring these essential ideas back into focus and ensure they are working at their best. So emphasising the value of mistakes or how to get round tricky learning are things that should always bubble along in the background.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 materials and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme.

A key teaching strategy

Create a challenge wall

Make the Challenge wall the focal point for your challenge culture. Make sure you add and refer to it frequently. For example:

  • Invite students to post up the most challenging questions they can think of. Allocate time to discuss them. The wall becomes a challenging talking point.
  • Cover the wall with challenges. questions, extension tasks, riddles, puzzles etc. These could be used by students who have finished their tasks early. Alternatively, set aside lesson time to for the whole class to discuss a challenge they select.
  • Display students’ work which shows mistakes they have learned from. This would include problems which students have persisted with or work that has been revised and edited to improve it.

What we notice and what we talk about matters. Students are ever-alert to the underlying culture of the classroom – ‘does this teacher really want me to make mistakes, or is she more interested in me getting it right?’

What’s more, you can say you want them to make mistakes as often as you like, but if your reward systems are tilted towards ‘correct’ answers, they will readily sense the inconsistency.

How do you / will you show your sustained commitment to students making mistakes and learning from them?

The idea of a challenge wall is explored in the Perseverance module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of students celebrating and sharing mistakes is introduced in the Revising module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

A strategy to encourage students to spot mistakes is introduced in the Revising module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

The_Secret_Garden_book_cover_-_Project_Gutenberg_eText_17396

 

3.3. Deepen displays of learning.

Classroom displays offer a rich array of advice on ‘how to’: use learning behaviours; avoid wobble; find successful learning strategies; improve results; and understand their progression in learning behaviours.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

At this stage, which could be about eighteen months or so into your work with learning power, you have plenty of material to work with. There are the original four learning capacities plus the ones you are gradually adding to the mix. So your walls should be alive with information on the value and ‘how to advice’ on, planning or making links, or questioning or doing bits of reasoning. And in amongst all that advice and ‘know how’ be sure to save a bit of wall space to capture students own feelings about their growth in these capacities.

A key teaching strategy

Understanding their own progression

A village school in Cumbria has developed pictorial ladders for the learning behaviours they are focusing on – the ones illustrated relate to aspects of Collaboration and Perseverance.

Beside the ladders, students are expected to write about themselves and how they know where they are now. They are:

  • self-assessing;
  • explaining which of the skills they believe they use a lot;
  • offering evidence for when and how they did it.

Hence this piece of wall isn’t just about showing progression in learning, it’s more about reflecting on the process and coming to understand themselves as learners…in action!

The idea of creating your own progression trajectories is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

 

Further Teaching Ideas

Creating and displaying mindmaps to chart the development of ideas is introduced in the Noticing module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

A strategy for developing learning trajectories is introduced in the Listening module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

[The same strategy can, of course, be applied to creating trajectories for all of the 12 learning behaviours.]

 

STAGE 4 Embed opportunities for independent learning.

I ensure we celebrate learning development targets that are informed by the phases of progression. I help students understanding how their growth in a wider range of learning behaviours is leading to progress in subject areas.

As a result, my students pursue their own targets for improvement as a learner and believe that learning is indeed a learnable craft.

4.1. Embed strengthening of learning growth.

Students’ agreed learning development goals are guided by the school’s maps of progression. Teaching now gives greater recognition to improving the nuances of students’ learning growth across the twelve learning behaviours.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

It often happens that you see students struggling to do something and, short of telling them how to, you wonder just how you might help. What is it that the student could be doing but they’re not? A lack of confidence or understanding in a critical aspect of a learning behaviour can make a big difference to progress. For example it might be being able to visualise what they want to achieve, make or create (see Imagining, Green, Values) or being confident to justify and say why we are thinking something (see Reasoning, Blue, Responds). So by this stage, as you see your students learning by using more and more learning behaviours, you will need to become far more familiar with the learning behaviour progression charts. They now come into their own in helping you to remember the finer points of helping students to improve.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 materials and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme.

A key teaching strategy

A Visible Teaching Routine

  • What’s happening here?

  • What makes you say that?

This is one of many visible thinking routines to be found on the visible thinking website

Download as a pdf

The first question in this routine is flexible: it is useful when looking at objects such as works of art or historical artefacts, but it can also be used to explore a poem, make scientific observations and hypotheses, or investigate more conceptual ideas (i.e. democracy).
The first question invites students to describe what they notice, see or know, but it is the supplementary question (What makes you say that?) that requires them to build explanations. It promotes evidence-based reasoning and when the students share their interpretations it encourages them to understand alternatives and multiple perspectives.

This visible thinking routine is explored in the Reasoning module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of students creating a hierarchy of questioning behaviours is introduced in the Questioning module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

A checklist that illustrates progression in link making is introduced in the Making Links module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

[You could, of course, create such checklists for all of the learning behaviours – just pick out some key ideas from the relevant progression charts.]

4.2. Embed access to pinpointed learning behaviours.

I focus the classroom climate around the particular learning strategies, attitudes or behaviours that seem to lie behind students’ progress needs. I share this approach with parents as well as students.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

Your emphasis here is on ways to be successful rather than a concern with failure. By becoming familiar with the detail of the learning charts all aspects of your teaching will become more focused. Furthermore the detailed learning charts offer ideas that you might share with parents and encourage them to support at home.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 materials and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme.

A key teaching strategy

Identify high level learning capacities in the learning grids

Frame in the form of ‘nudging learning’ statements and use through giving feedback and expand the classroom’s learning language.

Higher level Reasoning skills include:

  • creating sound arguments backed by evidence;
  • balancing differing possibilities;
  • using ‘if . . . then . . . ‘ type reasoning;
  • detecting flaws in logic.

Higher level Imagining skills include:

  • visualising the future to enhance performance;
  • breaking the ‘rules’ to achieve novel outcomes;
  • being willing and prepared to follow one’s intuition;
  • disregarding conventional wisdom.

Higher level Link Making skills include:

  • keeping an open mind;
  • seeing connections between different disciplines;
  • using analogies make links between new and older learning;
  • applying ‘school learning’ to real world problems.

 

The idea of creating celebratory feedback for higher order learning behaviours is introduced in the Making Links module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

 

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of valuing second and third attempts over a first attempt is introduced in the Revising module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

A strategy for enhancing reports to parents is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

 

4.3. Embed interaction of learning behaviours with curriculum in displays.

Together with my students, we create displays that illustrate how learning behaviours and content learning are inter-related and growing strongly.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

It’s essential for you, and sometimes for students, to understand the relationships between what is being learned, i.e. the curriculum content, and how the learning behaviours being used help this learning to happen. Much of the time this link will be happening in your head or in your plans. But once and only once, did we see this link displayed on classroom walls for all to see and understand. These displays had such a profoundly beneficial effect on both staff, students and parents that we share one here.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 materials and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme.

A key teaching strategy

Make coupling content and process public

Every classroom in Cadland Primary school has two walls dedicated to current curriculum plans, one for maths and one for literacy. The purpose of these displays is to show the journey of the current a unit of work. They show;

  • what the objectives are;
  • what the success criteria look like;
  • what the stages of the process consist of;
  • what is being learned at each stage;
  • prompts about the new things being learned;
  • what the end result might look like.

These visual journeys are talked about and added to as the class progresses through the unit content. Learning behaviours are added to each point in the plan. Now students are not only aware of what they are learning about but the learning behaviours they are using to help them get to grips with the content.

The broad brush descriptions of the learning behaviours being used is a powerful, visual coupling of content and process; the what with the how of learning.

The first photograph shows the learning behaviours they are using as they move through the unit. The second photograph shows a reflection on the learning behaviours used and what this accomplished.

The idea of creating displays that link content and learning behaviours is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

Further Teaching Ideas

A strategy for enabling students to create a display about the intricacies of Meta Learning is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green, but the strategy can of course be used with the progression charts of any of the learning behaviours.

A strategy for displaying links with prior learning is introduced in the Making Links module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

 

 

STAGE 5 Securing effective independent learners.

I have created a culture where students feel valued, confident contributors who are able to learn from mistakes, identify and pursue their own learning development targets and confidently rise to challenges.

As a result, my students have their own plans for becoming ever more effective lifelong learners and a firm belief in their wide range of capacities to change and improve.

5.1. Secure the growth of learning behaviours.

I encourage and enable students to identify and pursue their own learning behaviour development targets. They now understand how they need to improve and how to go about it.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

By this stage your students are very aware of the range and development of their learning behaviours. They should now be able to take control of their own learning journey. One way to help students take control is by introducing them to motivation research and an effective solution called ‘if-then’ planning.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 materials and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme.

A key teaching strategy

Effective learning targets – a quick reminder

Advice about ‘making more effort’ or ‘asking more questions in class’ are almost never effective because they are ill-defined and beg more questions than answers – how much more effort? what kind of effort? / how many more questions? what type of questions?

If we want students to grow their learning behaviours we need to help them to think much more closely about the ‘hows’ and the ‘whats’. Motivation research proposes an effective solution to this called ‘if-then’ planning.

 

‘Ifs’ are the situations you want to remind yourself about. It is the bit that reminds you about the target.

‘Thens’ are what you will do about something, the action you will take.

View some levelled if/then targets for Reasoning

The idea of using if-then targets is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

Further Teaching Ideas

Similar levelled If / Thens for Collaboration can be found in the Collaboration module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

The idea of students setting their own development targets is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

5.2. Secure the development of success.

I ensure students feel able to learn from mistakes and are valued confident contributors to learning. Everyone is alert to, and counter, all manner of unhelpful attitudes to learning. They are equipped to learn profitably for themselves.

Image result for my classroom

More detail...

What’s happening here?

Effectively seeing mistakes or getting things wrong negatively are long gone. Lazy and reluctant learners too are words and attitudes of the past. Mistakes are now viewed as valuable opportunities for learning and students are well equipped emotionally, socially, cognitively and strategically to learn for themselves.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 materials and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme.

A key teaching strategy

The language of ownership and community

How are you most likely to describe your usual classroom?

  1. My classroom?
  2. Our classroom?
  3. Their classroom?

And does it make any difference?

In his book, ‘Creating Cultures of Thinking’, Ron Ritchhart argues that the pronouns we use, like my/your/our and 1/you/we/us, betray our deep-seated views and belief systems. Most of us are completely oblivious to how we talk in terms of the pronouns we use, but our choices, he argues, convey a powerful if hidden message to students.

Consider for a moment the teacher who asks:

What are you noticing?

[This may be a question of an individual (the singular ‘you’) or of more than one person (the plural ‘you’). Some students even interpret it as a question for other people, but not for them.]

Contrast that with essentially the same question:

What are we noticing?

[This time it is definitely plural, and includes the teacher. It is a clear invitation to shared endeavour.]

Likewise the phrases ‘your success criteria’ or ‘the success criteria’ are very similar to, but subtly different from, ‘our success criteria’

Will marginal shifts in language like this make a significant difference on their own? Almost certainly not, Ritchhart argues. But if we are serious about beginning to share responsibility with students we need to make sure that our language reflects that commitment rather than, unintentionally, undermining it.

 

Image result for my classroom

Related Ideas you may have met previously

The issue of how teachers talk about ‘work’ and about ‘learning’ is explored in the Perseverance module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

It is also mentioned in The Learning Powered School, p70/71, and in ‘Playing the Learning Power Game’.

The idea of ‘flipping’ the emphasis of how goals are expressed was introduced in Playing the Learning Power Game and also appears in the Perseverance module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

 

5.3. Secure learning to learn values.

I ensure ‘learning to learn’ values are alive: on classroom walls; in how activities are structured, in how feedback is offered; in how written work is commented on; in how students are grouped; in how learning is viewed from the learner’s perspective.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

Learning to learn values have been secured and can be witnessed in your classroom culture, in your relationships with students and in how the curriculum is organised. It’s not just displayed on classroom walls but in the whole look and feel of  learning. Your classroom walls will of course be adorned with helpful tips and ‘feel good’ celebrations. Your interpretation of the curriculum in classroom activities will illustrate your now deep understanding of how learning behaviours grow. Your grouping of students to work together, the language you use to support their learning all add up to a learning enhancing environment. You’ll know it when you see it, feel it, talk it and love it. And so will your students.

An opportunity to reflect on classroom culture and display

You have already made changes to your classroom culture and how it is displayed through your engagement with the phase 1 module Playing the Learning Power Game and you are now looking at Stage 5 in phase 2. Display in your classroom should have developed significantly over this period to reflect the many changes to classroom culture you have made.

But, take a little time to check that display in your classroom adequately reflects and supports these cultural shifts.

Download the Display Amble, and find a bit of quiet time in your classroom to take a hard look at display – is it keeping up with the cultural changes you have made?

For each of the 16 statements about classroom display, rate your own classroom displays using the following scale:

1 = Display in my classroom is nothing like this

2 = Display in my classroom is a bit like this

3 = Display in my classroom is a lot like this

4 = This accurately describes display in my classroom

You should be seeing lots of 3s and 4s as your displays have matured over time. But are there any 2s or 1s that might need a little attention?

What might you need to do about this?

Download the display amble

Where to look for Ideas

Have a wander around your own school and look at classrooms through the lens of the Display Amble, focussing especially on your perceived weaknesses in your own displays. Are there any displays from which you can learn? Indeed – are you seeing any displays that are so effective that they should be shared more widely across the school?

Ask yourself – what will you now do as a result of having carried out this Display Amble?

 

You are currently in the section ‘Celebrating Learning’

Return to ‘the professional learning power game route map’Relating for LearningTalking for LearningConstructing LearningCelebrating Learning

 

Continue Reading

Constructing Learning

Return to ‘the professional learning power game route map’Relating for LearningTalking for LearningConstructing LearningCelebrating Learning

Practical ways to grow your practice in lesson design

STAGE 1 Introduce four key learning behaviours.

I plan lessons that intentionally provide challenging tasks that activate one or more key learning behaviours and give learners opportunities to stop and reflect. I build learning behaviours into lesson objectives and gain students’ interest/attention by building lessons from intriguing questions.

As a result, my students recognise that their learning is an active, exciting process that needs lots of their attention and effort as understanding of their learning behaviours grows.

1.1. Introduce activities planned to activate learning behaviours.

I ensure activities are designed to ensure students make use of one or more of the behaviours being introduced. Lesson objectives state the ‘How’ before the ‘What’ of learning, hence students become aware of the sort of effort I want them to make.

More detail...

What’s happening here

For years we have approached lessons or even whole curriculum design with questions like ‘what do we want students to learn?’ and answered with ‘by doing what sort of task/activity?’. If you think about this you’ll quickly realise that the learner and their learning behaviours have been left out of the equation. If we are to build students’ learning power we need to put consideration of learning behaviours into the heart of lesson planning. What content? By using which behaviours? By doing what sort of task? That one question…by using which behaviours?…lies at the heart of building students’ learning capacities.

A key teaching strategy

It is through the learning activities teachers plan that learning behaviours get a workout. The role of learning activities is to enable your students to access and wrestle with information and ideas; to help them use and understand something; to ensure their effectiveness as a learner. The ‘right’ activity helps to make new concepts more concrete. The ‘right’ activity provides insights into new ideas and subject matter. The ‘right’ activities need to be carefully chosen and, critically, linked to the learning goal.

Selecting activities

Evidence shows that goals that relate to doing something or researching something, or creating something . . . are better motivators than goals that relate to knowing something. Hence, in putting a lesson together the 3 key questions are:

  • what is to be learned? (goals)
  • by students using which learning behaviour (s)?
  • by doing what sort of activity?

Shifting the way you plan.

Think through lesson planning a bit differently:

  • the learning behaviours that could be useful for getting to grips with the content;
  • how the design of activities /tasks will best stimulate these behaviours;
  • how learners could be made more aware of these behaviours;
  • how learners could be enabled to reflect on and evaluate their use of these behaviours.

In planning terms, you have made a shift from thinking;

  • From ‘what do I have to teach and how am I going to teach it?’
  • To ‘what do students need to learn, how will they best learn it, and how am I going to orchestrate that learning?’

Your lessons are constructed to help students understand how they will be learning the content and learning behaviours are built into lesson objectives. There is a growing recognition that lessons have twin intentions – to learn content and to exercise specific learning behaviours.

Learners are just becoming aware of the learning behaviours they are expected to exercise and are coming to understand that there is more to learning than just ‘knowing stuff’.

These ideas, introduced in Playing the Learning Power Game, are developed further in Section 3 (Big questions to ask about lesson design) of all of the phase 2 modules.

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of ‘flipping’ the emphasis of how goals are expressed was introduced in Playing the Learning Power Game and also appears in the Perseverance module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

Section 3 of all of the phase 2 modules contains detailed planning for lessons and activities relating to the given learning behaviour.

 

1.2. Introduce grapple tasks.

I introduce low-stakes grapple tasks as opportunities to align students’ thinking about what it means to be an effective learner, where thinking about what they know and trying hard are enjoyably worthwhile.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

Perhaps at this early stage the most important learning capacity to understand and strengthen is perseverance; being able to keep going, not simply to produce ‘right answers’ but to be able to grapple productively with a problem. Using low-stakes grapple tasks, maybe early in a lesson, helps students to enjoy wrestling with a problem, to try things out, to notice what works and what doesn’t and then to discuss what happened and why.

A key teaching strategy

Start lessons with a grapple task

A good grapple problem is challenging. It’s something that the students might have an idea about but might entail something they haven’t come across or done before. A good grapple task centres on learning that is just beyond the students’ reach/experience. They give students a chance to wrestle with the problem before they have been taught methods for tackling it. They are allowed to solve it in any way they want and in doing so they are discovering their own approaches and exposing their own tricky bits.

You could blend grapple tasks with Think Pair Share…giving time to think by themselves, share ideas with a partner before discussing it more widely. By using grapple tasks you are getting the students to:

  • build resilience;
  • develop problem solving skills;
  • enhance collaboration and listening;
  • cultivate ‘having a go’;
  • lessen fear of mistakes.

Don’t forget to discuss which strategies were used, which were successful/effective and why.

Grapple Tasks first appear in Playing the Learning Power Game and are also in the Perseverance module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of planning to get students stuck is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

Image result for get stuck

Think, Pair, Share is introduced in the Collaboration module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

 

1.3. Introduce reflection as a formative part of learning

I regularly prompt my students to pause and reflect on what they are doing and how they are progressing. I nudge them to attend to how they are learning.

Image result for learn from experience

More detail...

What’s happening here?

As Mike Hughes comments in his book Tweak to Transform, “Learning without reflection is like trying to fill a bath without putting the plug in”. But often reflection is seen as just something that happens in a few minutes before the end of a lesson. It’s better to think of reflection is a formative activity which you can make sure students practise regularly in order to secure their understanding, review their progress and plot any necessary changes in direction. Reflection needs to be woven through every lesson; being done by learners, not for them.

A key teaching strategy

Build in lesson review points – so that students reflect for themselves

The problem with lesson review points (or plenaries) is that they are often teacher-led. Too often they are a recap of what the teacher wanted students to learn – little more than a restating of the learning intentions and a quick check of student understanding. Necessary, maybe, but not the opportunity for students to reflect for themselves on what they are learning, have learned or how they are/ have learned it.

Try the simple method of students talking in pairs to distil:

  • three things we have learned so far;
  • three things we still need to find out;
  • three things we hope to do next.

Select one or two pairs to feed their opinions back to the rest of the class. Steer students to explain what they think they have learned rather than to hear what you think you have taught them. Gradually add in questions about the learning behaviours they have been using;

  • three ways we are learning
  • the most useful learning behaviour so far
  • a useful learning behaviour we might need to try

You are beginning to give students a richer language in which to couch their reflective thinking.

This was first introduced in Unit 3, Section 3B of Playing the Learning Power Game, and in phase 2 in the Meta Learning module, section 2, i) Moving from Blue to Green.

Image result for learn from experience

Further Teaching Ideas

Going for Three is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

To encourage students to reflect on which learning behaviours they have been using, try the Rating Wheel which is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

 

STAGE 2 Add a broader range of learning behaviours.

I now plan lessons using a broader range of learning behaviours. My lesson plans have twin intentions that emphasise both the ‘how’ and the ‘what’ of learning. I expect learners to monitor how they are learning and reward effort rather than ability.

As a result, my students reflect on both what and how they have learned and learn to link their increasingly wide range of learning behaviours to their effort to improve.

 

2.1. Broaden the range of learning behaviours being used.

Lessons now invite a far broader range of learning behaviours with ‘hands on’ opportunities to experience participation in using decision making, thinking for themselves, wondering ‘what if’ or discovering links etc. Thus more of the curriculum is brought into play.

More detail...

What’s happening here

You are now very alert to the transition from content-only planning, to planning that weaves content, planned activities and learning behaviours being developed. Hence the content is the vehicle for growing learning behaviours and getting better at those learning behaviours aids and speeds content acquisition. At this stage you are adding more learning behaviours into the mix and sharing more of the responsibility for learning with your students. They are becoming increasingly aware that learning isn’t a single activity, that there are many learning behaviours they can use and that they become a better learner by developing a wide range of these behaviours.

A key teaching strategy

Organise activities to require more learning behaviours.

Consider a Science curriculum that involves, at some stage, students undertaking a practical experiment.

The skills required to observe the teacher conduct the experiment and then faithfully recreate the experiment as an individual requires skills of observation, listening, attention to detail, following a prescribed plan etc.

Contrast that with the skills required when the teacher puts students into small groups and challenges them to work together to plan how to do the experiment, to identify and gather the resources needed, to conduct the experiment, and to reflect together on how they could have planned it more efficiently.

Same experiment – with different learning behaviours stimulated by how the teacher chooses to organise the activity.

These ideas around curriculum planning were introduced in Playing the Learning Power Game (Unit 3, section 3A5)

Click here to revisit the section on curriculum planning

Further Teaching Ideas

To support students to think ahead of taking action, go to the Planning module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

To support students to identify key features, to separate the big ideas from the detail, use the Headlines routine which is introduced in the Noticing module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

 

2.2. Build self-help to support challenging activities.

We explore the meaning of making an effort by encouraging the use of different strategies or trial / error or checking success criteria or simply asking for feedback. By offering different levels of challenge I ensure the need for perseverance, and praise effort rather than ability.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

Basically this is about strengthening your students’ ability to help themselves as a learner. In this phase you are bringing more learning behaviours into play and you need to be careful not to overwhelm students with the realisation that they have lots of ways to grow as a learner. Hence here we are just suggesting that you don’t neglect the basics and continue building in basic self-help features like, trying things out or checking success criteria or even helping students to understand what is means to ‘make an effort’.

A key teaching strategy

Explore the meaning of effort

Effort is a word that teachers use frequently, but what does it mean? How might students decode this and begin to do it purposefully?

  • Explore what is meant by ‘effort’ with your students, and discuss with them the ways in which they might apply it.
  • Encourage them to come up with a definition of effort and specific examples of what it might look like in the classroom – for example by;
    • trying different strategies to solve a problem,
    • using a Visible Thinking Routine (VTR)
    • aiming to achieve challenging goals, or
    • using different un-sticking techniques when something is tricky.
    • paying attention to whoever is speaking.

Targeted Effort is now seen as a path to mastery. Students need to be aware of a connection between effort and improvement; that their effort is causing their improvement. This is why it is important to give effort meaning. Meaning often underpins motivation which in turn drives behaviour.

Targeted effort is effort that has direction and purpose. It is underpinned by clear guidance and the specific goal to be achieved.

What you are doing here is giving effort a size and direction. What students need to understand is that their effort has a size and a purpose.

Give students an idea of what effort looks like in practice.

  • Demonstrating a task which you expect them to complete later in the lesson.
  • Explain what you are doing, in terms of effort, as you go along.
  • Your commentary might include:
    • referring to success criteria to plan and direct your actions
    • using an unsticking strategy when you come across something tricky
    • looking for feedback from the class on your efforts, and adjusting your course in the face of that feedback
    • reminding yourself to refocus when a distraction comes along.

Effort is explored in the Perseverance module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of students selecting their own level of challenge is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

Image result for seeking challenges

Use mind maps in a variety of ways to help students to make connections between prior and new learning in the Making Links module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

Use ‘In Other Words’ in the same module to summarise and distil new learning.

 

2.3. Continue active reflection across a broader range of behaviours.

I inject into lessons a requirement for students to ‘watch out for’: how they are learning; ways of solving problems; how to get out of difficulties – i.e. to monitor their learning process, reflect on how they are learning and evaluate its success. It is a process woven formatively throughout the learning process.

Learning about Me Learning (Meta-learning)

More detail...

What’s happening here?

What you’re trying to do here is to strengthen the reflective process across all lessons and across the new learning behaviours that you are gradually adding into mix. Reflecting on the process of learning itself helps learners to become aware of which learning behaviours they are using. You can expand their thinking from simply knowing which behaviour they are using to exploring how they collaborate or how they reason, or how they make links.

A key teaching strategy

Getting to grips with metacognition

In the last few years teachers have come to know and understand much about meta-cognition and self-regulation.

Metacognition…is about monitoring and controlling your thought processes.

Self-regulation…is about monitoring and controlling your feelings and behaviours.

The two come together in Self-regulated learning…the application of metacognition and self-regulation to learning.

These approaches, which have always been at the heart of developing learning power, aim to help students think about their own learning more explicitly, often by teaching them specific strategies for planning, monitoring and evaluating their learning.

The resource alongside, which may sit on a table or be displayed on the classroom wall, is designed to enable students to reflect on their use of their collaborative learning behaviours in a lesson or over a day. Notice that the statements on the resource are adapted from similar ones in the progression grids.

This learning mat is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

[Find similar mats for all of the other learning behaviours at Section 2, iii) in the respective phase 2 modules.]

Learning about Me Learning (Meta-learning)

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of the meta-learning cycle is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

The idea of students taking time to think in advance about how they might tackle a problem was introduced in Playing the Learning Power Game, and appears in the Planning module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

 

 

STAGE 3 Deepen understanding of the how of learning.

I design lessons, schemes of work or medium term plans to grow a deeper understanding of learning behaviours. I use a wide range of task types to activate deeper learning and expect learners to select their own levels of challenge.

As a result, my students self-monitor their own learning behaviours across an ever growing range, choosing their own levels of challenge, wisely, with progression in mind.

3.1. Bringing learning growth into clearer focus

Helping students become better learners now goes deeper into curriculum design to answer the question ‘If we want students to achieve xxx, what sort of learning behaviour(s) will they need to use to be able to address and understand the content?’ This means thinking about learning at the level in the progression charts.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

This is the most sophisticated point in curriculum planning. Now you’re ready to link sequenced content with a more elaborate understanding of the stages of learning behaviour growth. So, for example, if you were designing activities to strengthen revising/reflecting then, ‘revise what you are doing’ would become something much more specific like ‘make use of this checklist of ideas to make sure you’re on track (Blue) or ‘rethink or retry ideas as you go along’ (Green) or ‘I want you to think about why you did it that way’ (Green) etc. Hence, the curriculum is delivered so that it stretches both content and particular aspects of learning behaviours.

A key teaching strategy

The holy grail of curriculum planning is: carefully sequenced content related planning that ensures that students’ understanding of their growth as a learner is of equal importance as their progressive understanding of the content matter.

But now we have a much more elaborated understanding of, for example, ‘Collaboration’ through the collaboration progression chart. Depending on the collaboration skill levels of learners, ‘working together’ might become ‘listen carefully to others and share your own ideas’ or ‘contribute to creating and agreeing a realistic team plan’ etc.

At this depth of planning, both the content specific learning behaviours and the activity specific learning behaviours are differentiated by reference to learning behaviours drawn from the relevant progression trajectories.

In terms of making learning visible, planning has moved beyond ‘today you will need your reasoning skills’ to ‘today you will need to able explain your thinking to neighbour and offer evidence to support your thinking’. We have moved beyond simply naming the skill to identifying a particular aspect of the learning behaviour.

Outcomes for teaching… learning is a shared responsibility, and has become a shared endeavour between teachers and learners. Teachers make learning and how to get better at learning visible to learners – through talk, feedback and display. Teachers ensure that the curriculum is constructed so that it stretches both content and learning behaviours. Teachers value the growth of learning behaviours equally alongside progress and attainment. The growth in a wide range of learning behaviours is noticed, discussed and celebrated.

Outcomes for learning…learners have taken control their own development as learners. They have a deep understanding of, and can talk fluently about, the process of learning. They are aware of their learning strengths and which aspects of learning behaviours they are seeking to improve, and understand how improving as a learner supports and strengthens their progress and attainment.

 

These ideas around curriculum planning were introduced in Playing the Learning Power Game.

Click here to revisit the section on curriculum planning

Further Teaching Ideas

Section 3 of each of the phase 2 modules has a detailed lesson plan to illustrate how learning behaviours drawn from the progression charts can be woven into curriculum planning.

A strategy for encouraging students to explore and find out more is introduced in the Capitalising module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

XIR3675 Landscape with the Fall of Icarus, c.1555 (oil on canvas) by Bruegel, Pieter the Elder (c.1525-69); 73.5x112 cm; Musees Royaux des Beaux-Arts de Belgique, Brussels, Belgium; (add.info.: Icarus seen with his legs thrashing in the sea;); Giraudon; Flemish, out of copyright

 

3.2. Deepen students’ management of challenge by extending the range of planned activities.

I offer students a wide range of activity types in order to use the broader range of behaviours and enhance challenge. I couple activities with visible thinking routines to support and guide the growth of learning behaviours.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

As a teacher of course you want to design lessons to develop knowledge and effective learning behaviours in your students. Frequently they’ll be carefully structured to ensure the curriculum is ‘covered’ and the ‘right’ knowledge, and understandings are offered. Sometimes learning activities may be wild and more open ended.

Here we invite you to consider the range of activities that you routinely plan for your students and challenge you to expand your repertoire.

It is about balancing lesson structures and giving students more room to manoeuvre, more chances to take control of their learning. It’s about thinking about how different activity types trigger and require varying levels of learner independence.

A key teaching strategy

All teachers design activities to help their students to access and understand the content of the lesson. These activities lie at the heart of lesson planning, linking what is to be learned with how it will be learned. While it is impossible to list all such activities, it is possible to discern some different types of activities, to identify some overarching categories or groups of activities.

Our list of activity types run from highly teacher-focused activities at the bottom that demand little more than attentive listening from the learner, through to ‘Finding’ type activities at the top that depend on both high levels of learner independence where learners are capable of accessing the content with minimal direct instruction. The activities that you choose will be critical to how students will learn how to learn and their love of learning itself.

These activity types were introduced in Playing the Learning Power Game.

Click here to read about Activity Types

Further Teaching Ideas

Introduce the Visible Thinking Routine ‘See, Think, Wonder’.

See Think Wonder is introduced in the Noticing module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue, and further developed in iii). It also forms the basis of section 3 in Noticing.

Although introduced in Noticing (because the routine begins with ‘See’), the ‘Think’ part invites a combination of Reasoning and Imagining, while the ‘Wonder’ part activates Questioning.

Issues around how teachers scaffold learning was introduced in Playing the Learning Power Game, and also appears in the Perseverance module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

Image result for scaffolding

3.3. Deepen learning making reflecting part of the process.

Throughout a lesson, or even a day, I prompt learners to reflect on what they are doing, whether they are keeping to plans, or why and how they have changed. This is enabling them to think on their feet and change their minds as they go along.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

As students develop understanding of the processes of learning they’ll be able to explain, for example, both how they reflect and how effectively they revise what they are doing. Conversations and actions will move on from ‘reflect on what you are doing’ to being more specific in helping students recognise that learning is a process that needs constant ‘rethinking or redoing’ (Revising progression chart – Green); being able to ‘detect errors in order to improve’ (Yellow); feeling able to ‘challenge accepted ways of doing things’ (Yellow). Statements drawn from the learning growth grids will help you translate the language and action of the classroom, and students will far more aware of how they are learning.

A key teaching strategy

Use the Visible Thinking Routine:

I used to think . . . . . Now I think. This routine helps students to reflect on how and why their thinking/understanding is changing. Remind students of the topic you have been working on. Ask them to respond to each of the sentence stems: I used to think…, Now, I think… Alternatively ask students to write down their views at the beginning of a topic. Invite them to revisit & update their answer during and at the end in light of what has been learned. Or, at the beginning of a lesson ask students to write down what they understand by a particular term that will be explored in the coming lesson (e.g. Phrase (English); Proof (Maths); Power (Science) etc). At the end of the lesson, ask them to write down what they now understand by the term.

The visible thinking routine ‘I used to think’ is introduced in the Revising module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

Further Teaching Ideas

Use the visible thinking routine Think, Puzzle, Explore to encourage students to reflect on what they already know about a topic, to consider what they do not yet understand and how they might go about finding out. The idea was introduced in Playing the Learning Power Game and appears in the Questioning module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

Use it at the beginning of a topic as a means of connecting with prior learning and setting the stage for deeper enquiry.

Use the visible thinking routine Connect, Extend, Challenge to encourage students to reflect on how what they are learning is connected to their prior knowledge, how their understandings have been extended, and what they still need to find out. The idea was introduced in Playing the Learning Power Game and appears in the Making Links module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

Use it after learning has already happened as a means of connecting new learning with prior learning.

 

STAGE 4 Embed opportunities for independent learning.

I enable learners to undertake extended enquiry-based learning and contribute to co-designing and co-delivering aspects of the curriculum. I expect them to create their own performance goals / targets for how they will operate as learners.

As a result, my students relish tackling challenging materials, monitor as they go along, and evaluate at the end to ensure improvement next time. They have acquired a deep understanding of themselves as a learner and how to continue improving.

4.1. Embed opportunities for students to lead or guide lessons.

I offer students choices in what to learn and increase their opportunities to contribute, co-design or co-deliver and pursue their own necessary improvements in learning behaviours in appropriate areas of the curriculum.

Tasc Planning Wheel

More detail...

What’s happening here?

This is about loosening the reins somewhat and engaging students in contributing to the what and how of learning. It’s about giving your students tools or frameworks to help them take on learning for themselves. How often you use these approaches will depend on how your students are building their learning behaviours. You won’t want them to come up against big problems at this early stage but they will need to be able to handle uncertainty and have had earlier opportunities to manage and organise their own learning.

A key teaching strategy

Offer tools to help guide problem based learning

A graphic organiser that is much used in primary schools to help students to plan their approach to an investigation or problem. The TASC wheel, derived from Thinking Actively in a Social Context, is a framework that helps develop thinking and problem-solving skills. With TASC, learners can think through a problem to the best outcome – and understand why it’s the best outcome.

TASC will guide students through the stages of thinking and problem-solving in an organised way, starting at one o’clock working clockwise. If you have a complex or wide-ranging problem you want to tackle, it offers a means of organising and synthesising a range of ideas.

Much like PEE (Point / Evidence / Explain) that helps students to structure a paragraph, the TASC wheel gives a simple way of helping them to sequence what they do to undertake an investigation.

The TASC wheel was introduced in Playing the Learning Power Game and appears in phase 2 in the Planning module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

Tasc Planning Wheel

 

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea using students’ questions to frame learning is introduced in the Questioning module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

Image result for question dice

The idea of the flipped classroom is also introduced in the Questioning module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

4.2. Embed opportunities for overcoming challenge.

I extend the variety of task types to include active experimentation, inquiry and reflection. Teams and individuals engage in and reflect on open-ended experiments as a key way of gaining knowledge and enabling them to tackle trickier challenges.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

Sometimes it’s worth the risk of using learning activities at the top of the Activities chart where little is known about how to do it. Only you can judge when you think your students will be ready to undertake their own enquiries or set up an investigation. It’s about putting your toe in the water and seeing what happens. Where in the curriculum might you have a go and give things over to students?

Below you’ll find a heart-warming story from a teacher who decided to give more control to his students.

A key teaching strategy

A science teacher described one of the enquiries thus:

“I’ve got my kids to do the experiment where they make salt from rock salt for years. Thus far I would tell them all they need to know to be successful, demonstrate the experiment to the whole class, and then ask them to repeat the experiment exactly as I had done it. It gave me control, took care of safety issues, and was as boring as it can get! Why, if you have just seen someone else do the experiment, would anyone be motivated to repeat it for themselves?

I explored my rationale for teaching in this way, and realised that, control aside, I believed that it enabled me to ‘deliver the course’, to ‘make sure’ they all had the revision notes they need, and to ‘convince myself’ that I had taught it well so that they simply must have learned it well. On reflection, this strategy was failing on all counts. Either I would have to re-double my efforts and ‘teach’ even more/better, or maybe there was another way . . . .

With trepidation, I went in with a lump of rock salt and a bowl of salt, and set them the challenge ‘I want you to find out how to make this (salt) from that (rock salt)’. I then sat down, refused to answer any further questions or offer guidance – and it was agony for someone so used to being the font of information in the classroom!

(I admit to making a couple of interventions relating to the safe use of Bunsen burners, but that aside I just let them get on with it.)

What a revelation! They all devised ways to make salt; they discovered the science behind it; they needed minimal external control; and I got a bit of a rest.

The students reported increased enjoyment levels, I reported reduced stress levels, and tests revealed a deeper scientific understanding than was previously the case.

My kids are challenging and frequently disruptive, so much so that mainstream schooling cannot handle them. How amazing that I gained more control and they achieved deeper learning when I stopped teaching for control and started letting them learn.

I realised that these kids need challenge and engagement, not control and instruction. I was afraid this change of approach would slow content learning down, but I was wrong. The learning was deeper and faster because they had done it for themselves, rather than observed it through the eyes of a science teacher. My kids were being scientists, not learning science.”

These activity types were introduced in Playing the Learning Power Game.

Click here to read about Activity Types

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of having a plan for tackling challenge is introduced in the Planning module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

For another ‘Finding’ type activity that blends Inferential Reasoning and Noticing, go to the Reasoning module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

4.3. Embed access to action-reflection learning.

I give students more say in the process of selecting, planning, organising, adjusting and evaluating their learning which enhances their reflection and responsibility and brings a richer language in which to couch their reflective thinking.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

As you begin to give more control of their learning away to students it makes sense to build a climate of collaboration and interdependency. Working with others, being part of a team, are essential life as well as learning skills. Think, pair, share will have been a favourite for years but there are other researched forms of group learning that are worth bringing into play every now and again.

A key teaching strategy

Try Jigsaw groups to scaffold content and build interdependence

  • Jigsaw methodology is used in all phases of education and importantly builds a climate of interdependence in the classroom, as each person’s activity is necessary for their colleagues to be able to learn.
  • The Jigsaw idea is to divide an area of enquiry into different sections, each one of which is allocated to a sub-group of the class (Aronson and Patnoe, 1997).
  • There are two phases to jigsaw groups:
    • Phase I, the sub-groups become temporary experts in their section of the project by researching what is needed. i.e. Red group with students A,B,C,D, work on one subset of the project. Blue group with students A,B,C,D, work on another subset of the project and so on
    • Phase II a new set of groups is then put together, each new group made up from ‘experts’ from each subset of the project i.e. all the A’s in a group. All the B’s etc.
    • Now the big picture of the project focus is created – students begin to create a grasp of the whole picture through each of their own efforts and understandings.
  • Invite students to reflect on their learning to:
    • compare intended with actual outcomes
    • evaluate their metacognitive strategies…what helped us to collaborate when? how did we handle disagreement?
    • analyse and draw causal relationships
    • pull together meanings
    • apply their learning to new situations
    • gain personal insights and learn from all their experiences.

Jigsaw grouping was introduced in Playing the Learning Power Game and also appears in the Collaboration module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

 

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of distinguishing between Monitoring and Evaluating was introduced in Playing the Learning Power Game and is developed in the Revising module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

A variation on jigsaw groups is introduced in the Listening module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

Jigsaw-Puzzle

Student self-evaluation of listening is introduced in the Listening module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

 

STAGE 5 Securing effective independent learners.

I enable learners to design and pursue their own enquiries and develop their own understanding through reflection. I continue to stretch learners by using strategies that keep learners at or near the edge of their individual comfort zones.

As a result, my students set high, self-imposed, standards, actively learning from experience and reflection.

5.1. Secure the blending of the ‘how’ with the ‘what’ of learning.

Every learning opportunity brings the ‘how’ of learning to the surface, blends the content with the process, captures student attention, strengthens the handling of uncertainty and collaboration, and embeds reflective practice.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

Governing the process of Constructing learning activities are 6 principles which stem from the original purpose of building students’ learning behaviours. The principles cover the capacities that will serve learners well in uncertain futures; how best to integrate these ‘knowledge acquiring capacities’ across a curriculum; how such a curriculum can enable students to work alone and interdependently with others, manage and organise their learning and become leaders of their own learning. A big but essential ask.

The six principles of designing and delivering learning powered lessons

One: Make the learning process visible

Students need to be very clear about the learning habits and processes which they are using. Teachers seek to make every aspect of the learning process as visible as possible through the language they use and through the words and images they display on the walls.

Two: Combine the ‘what’ and the ‘how’

Learning activities are designed to combine the dual objectives of ‘what’ will be learned and ‘how’ it will be learned. Students come to know that the content they are studying is a way of giving their minds a useful workout.

Three: Ensure emotional engagement

Teachers design lessons that intrigue their students. Students will not put in the effort to stretch their learning ‘muscles’ unless their energy and attention are captured by what they are doing. Emotional engagement is a prerequisite for learning that stretches and develops students’ powers of learning.

Four: Nurture handling uncertainty

What is engaging tends to be what is challenging. If education is a preparation for a learning life, students have to be helped to learn how to handle increasing degrees of complexity and uncertainty. Hence teachers create challenging tasks that stretch learning ‘muscles’.

Five: Build learning relationships

Learning is both a sociable and a solitary activity, and students need to learn how to move around in the social space of learning to best effect. Teachers enable their students to become interdependent learners who know how to handle themselves in collaborative groups.

Six: Develop reflection and responsibility

Students learn how to manage and organise their learning by being given increasingly demanding opportunities to do so. Teachers encourage their students to take charge of their own learning, planning what they do, distilling meaning from it, and revising it accordingly.

 

Download and use the Poles Apart diagram to ask yourself where you think you are now in relation to these six principles.

Download the 6 Principles Poles Apart Diagram

Further Teaching Ideas

These 6 principles are explored in section 3 of all of the phase 2 modules.

5.2. Secure a climate for relishing challenging engagement.

From teachers’ determination to get students to do the thinking, students now expect to be challenged, are much more actively engaged and are involved in the planning and delivery of lessons.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

There has to be time in timetables and bravery in teachers to sometimes step outside the confines of the curriculum and try something bold, fascinating and worthwhile. It might be about doing more enquiry based learning in one subject or with one teacher in one class or it might be something much more adventurous as shown below. By this stage it about having belief in experimenting and a belief in your students that they will value the experience.

A key teaching strategy

Enquiry-based learning

Developing curiosity, independence, and transferable research skills is at the heart of ‘enquiry-based learning’. This intent can be explained as:

‘committed to creating a challenging environment where innovation and flexibility are celebrated. An approach to learning that focuses on student enquiry provides both teachers and students with an opportunity to think outside the normal confines of the curriculum. Teachers are encouraged to work collaboratively to break free from content-driven curriculum planning, and to focus on the skills that they would like their learners to develop.’

Here are some examples from schools we have worked with, where students in KS2/3 experienced several weeks each term when different curriculum areas come together to provide investigative work designed to generate a spirit of enquiry and experimentation.

The humanities come together for an eight-week block to explore issues of migration under the driving question: Why don’t people stay at home? Science, PE and Mathematics combined for a unit called A Question of Sport where students investigate the science and maths of certain sports. They experimented, for example, with the ways tennis would change if ball weight and racquet sizes changed. RE and Humanities came together to consider a wide range of disastrous events—a tsunami, the Holocaust, the crucifixion, and explore the question: Does every cloud have a silver lining? After two weeks of research, groups present their findings to their peers, parents and teachers.

These and other similar ideas are explored in chapter 6 of The Learning Powered School.

The idea of Enquiry-based learning is also introduced in the Questioning module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of Appreciative Enquiry is introduced in the Collaboration module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

The idea of creating enquiries around cross-curricular themes is introduced in the Making Links module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

Related image

5.3. Secure the use of genuine personal reflection on learning.

Individuals and teams relish ever more learner-driven active participation, exploration and research and have developed a deep personal understanding of learning through reflection.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

Over time you have helped your students to learn how to manage and organise their learning by being given increasingly demanding opportunities to do so. You will also have encouraged students to take charge of their own learning, planning what they do, distilling meaning from it, and revising it accordingly. You have given them the skills to assess what they are achieving and the willingness to look at it critically in an effort to improve.

Here’s a reminder of some of the reflective practices you may have tried. If not it’s not too late to try them now.

A key teaching strategy

Have students analyse their own performance.

In order to reach the goals of progressing in their learning – be it content or process – students must be able to self-regulate their own learning. Providing feedback that enables students to do this includes;

  • Share assessment criteria with students and ask them to assess/comment on the (imperfect) solutions you provide. Invite them to produce improvements based on their own feedback.(as a class exercise)
  • Share assessment criteria with students and invite them to assess/comment on their own work, and amend it if necessary, before submitting it.
  • Ensure that your written comments are framed as questions to which your students are required to respond. “What do you think you need to do to make this section more convincing?” is preferable to “This section needs more explanation”, as it moves responsibility to the learner to identify what more needs to be done.

Insist that when students respond to your feedback they indicate what they will do differently next time. Get students into the habit of acting on feedback rather than merely reading it. ‘What they will do differently next time’ is their self-generated target for development.

These ideas are explored in the Revising module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of students analysing their own performance is developed in the Revising module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

The idea of Reflection ON Action (Evaluating) was introduced in Playing the Learning Power Game and is developed in the Revising module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

 

You are currently in the section ‘Constructing Learning’

Return to ‘the professional learning power game route map’Relating for LearningTalking for LearningConstructing LearningCelebrating Learning

 

Continue Reading

Talking for Learning

Return to ‘the professional learning power game route map’Relating for LearningTalking for LearningConstructing LearningCelebrating Learning

Research shows that the language we use to talk about education and learning deeply affects how individuals see themselves as learners. Even something as simple as changing ‘is’ to ‘could’ or talking about ‘learning’ rather than ‘work’ can make a difference. In this section we offer a rich vocabulary for thinking and talking about what learners actually do, and this in itself enables them to expand their capacity and appetite for learning

Practical ways to grow your practice in creating the language of learning

STAGE 1 Introduce four key learning behaviours.

I encourage learners to understand and talk about four key learning behaviours. I catch the moment and explore effective learning behaviours whenever I observe them. We have established rights and responsibilities in using these behaviours and frequently reflect on how students are using them.

As a result, my students can explain key learning behaviours and know when they are using one to good effect.

1.1. Introduce the language of the four learning behaviours being considered.

I use metaphors and stories to introduce the language and meaning of the four foundational learning behaviours to enable students to talk about and recognise these behaviours in use.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

You are at the start of making a big shift in the language of the classroom. The words you share with students to describe, explore and develop specific learning capacities will gradually have a profound effect on how students understand themselves as learners. The most useful start is to shift the traditional talk about ‘work’ to referring to it simply as ‘learning’. Research shows that this simple language shift helps students to become more locked on to learning, their minds to wander less, their imagination to be more active and to learn more. This simple shift just goes to show the importance of the language of learning.

A key teaching strategy

Make learning behaviours memorable.

Toys

Help younger students to understand the names of learning behaviours (like Collaborating, Persevering or Questioning) by having toys that are endowed with the behaviours. It may well be that you start with one or two soft toys and add to them over time.

The toys help students make ready links between the behaviour and the toys. However, these will work even better if the toy…animal, bird, fish etc… is, in nature, actually invested with the characteristics of that learning behaviour. Don’t just work with alliterations like…cat and capitalising. Better to ask yourself or the students which creature seems to be, for example, perseverant or seems to be collaborative and use those suggestions to represent the idea of a learning capacity..

Clip Art icons

You could simply ‘borrow’ these, but much better to involve students in designing and agreeing their own as a means of developing a conversation about the meaning of learning and growing their own learning language.

Having agreed a set of icons, helps students think about how they could use them to remind themselves of how they need to be / are learning.

The idea of using Animals / puppets / icons to scaffold students’ thinking is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

Further Teaching Ideas

The issue of how teachers talk about ‘work’ and about ‘learning’ is explored in the Perseverance module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

It is also mentioned in The Learning Powered School, p70/71, and in ‘Playing the Learning Power Game’.

The idea of talking about what good learners do is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

 

1.2. Introduce and promote noticing learning behaviours.

I introduce talking about learning itself, sometimes stopping the flow of a lesson to bring attention to the process of learning. “What does it feel like?’ ‘How did using xxx feel/work?’

More detail...

What’s happening here?

At this early stage you will need to train yourself to keep an eye on the learning behaviours that your students are using, and then take the opportunity to talk with them about them just ‘in the moment’. Students at this stage won’t be very conscious of Persevering or Questioning etc even though they are using them. So just slow things down and open up discussions on the behaviours you have spotted. This will help students to notice when they are using a learning behaviour.

A key teaching strategy

Couple seeing and talking about behaviours.

Keep an eye on the learning behaviours that your students are using, and take the opportunity to talk to them about it. Hard to plan for, because it is ‘in the moment’ opportunism, and easy to forget in the hurly burly of the busy classroom. Even if learners do not, as yet, fully understand the key learning behaviours of Perseverance, Questioning, Collaborating and Revising, they will exhibit these behaviours, even if they are not conscious of doing so. Use these opportunities to slow the classroom down and open up a short discussion about the successful behaviour that you have spotted. Such interludes have a number of benefits:

  • It signals to learners the teacher’s interest in learning behaviours.
  • It alerts learners to the behaviours that they already command.
  • It begins to explore the complexity of the 4 key behaviours.
  • It encourages students to observe and learn from the successful habits of others.
  • It opens up opportunities for meta cognitive talk.

By the way you express yourself you create a potent milieu that teachers students what kinds of learning are valued ’round here’, what their role is with respect to knowledge and what aspects of learning are worth paying attention to.

The idea of teachers looking for learning is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of students looking for learning is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

The idea of students Looking for and recording their own Learning is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

 

1.3. Eliminate negative learning language and establish rights and responsibilities.

I endeavour to ensure students accumulate an optimistic view of learning rather than grow a pessimistic view. I praise students when they use key learning behaviours effectively and work with them to establish learners’ rights and responsibilities for using the foundational four behaviours.

misc-teleportation-script-imbued

More detail...

What’s happening here?

Research has shown that there are two words, ‘never’ and ‘always’, which can be toxic and damaging to students. Hence right at the start of introducing a learning language it’s important to help students reframe reactions like ‘I can never understand’ or ‘I always find maths too hard’, which breed a kind of learned helplessness. Turn the tables by emphasising positive learning capacities that will ensure success or increase their skills. A further early stage is to gradually involve students in developing a list of the features of a learning behaviour, or the rights and responsibilities ground rules of its use. You are giving each learning behaviour familiarity, a shape and a purpose.

A key teaching strategy

Develop rights and responsibilities

Have students work in pairs or small groups to suggest a charter of matching rights and responsibilities or ground rules for collaboration. If everyone has a right to have their voice heard, everyone also has a responsibility to listen attentively to others and wait until they have finished speaking. This provokes interesting discussions, builds understanding and conveys the importance of learning behaviours.

The idea of students deciding ‘Rights and Responsibilities’ is introduced in the Collaboration module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

misc-teleportation-script-imbued

Further Teaching Ideas

Turning pessimistic to optimistic student talk.

The idea of changing pessimistic talk into optimistic talk was introduced in Playing the Learning Power Game (Unit 2).

View the page

Opening up a conversation about successful learning behaviours is introduced in the Capitalising module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

 

STAGE 2 Add a broader range of learning behaviours.

I help learners build up their learning vocabulary by gradually providing opportunities to think about a further eight learning behaviours. I encourage learners to slow down and notice how they are learning talk about the learning behaviours they are using and reflecting on their use.

As a result, my students recognise a wider range of learning behaviours and take time to think about how they have been learning.

2.1. Broaden the learning language across a wide range of behaviours.

I introduce the language and meaning of a broader range of learning behaviours in order to build students’ understanding of behaviours appropriate across different curriculum needs. e.g. imagining, reasoning, planning, listening.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

Having established the foundational four learning capacities so that students are fully aware of using them and know what ‘getting better’ looks like, it’s now time to introduce at least some of the other eight capacities. Hence at this point you are giving the language of learning a very big boost. Each learning capacity brings a language of its own and each aspect of that language will need to be shared with students at its introductory stage.

A key teaching strategy

Link learning behaviours to understanding famous characters.

Schools have found it useful to enable students to make links between familiar famous characters and the learning behaviours that they may have possessed.

The famous character might be a prominent sporting hero, someone from TV, a politician, a character being studied in a novel, a well-known person from History. . .

The point is to help students to understand how the learning behaviours are linked and contribute to the success of the chosen character.

In one school Father Christmas was attributed with Planning, Perseverance, Revising and Capitalising; while Winston Churchill helped win WW2 by Reasoning, Making Links, Capitalising, Imagining, Planning and Questioning. This approach to history proved highly popular. Seeing things from someone else’s perspective enabled them to develop a real understanding of what it means to use your imagination.

Learning Power Heroes. Read more about Learning Heroes in this book. But hurry, fewer than 100 left!

 

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of using characters in books to explore learning behaviours is introduced in the Collaborating module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

As a development of the idea of using icons or puppets to help students to remember learning behaviours, go to the Meta Learning module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

 

2.2. Broaden the language of reflection across more learning behaviours.

I enable students to reflect on the effectiveness of any new learning behaviour being introduced by considering how they are using it; how they applied it; when to use it again etc. Learning is becoming a part of students’ language.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

Here you are beginning to incorporate the language of learning into your natural classroom talk. You can turn your prompts and nudges into really useful statements by watching carefully through a LP lens and say ‘ how could you use your imagination to…?, Or, “What sort of questions might be helpful to take you further here?’ Your language is defining the sort of effort you want students to make. You are using this language of learning to nudge these positive learning tendencies.

A key teaching strategy

Discuss planning

Design a planning sheet to use with the children when you are planning an activity with them. You might include these and other headings:

  • What are we trying to achieve? (agreed goal, outcome)
  • How will we know we have been successful? (success criteria)
  • What do we need to do? (actions, jobs)
  • What will help us? (resources)
  • What might be a problem? (traps, obstacles)
  • What will we do about it? (What- if or contingency plans)
  • Who will do what? (roles) [Simplify according to age range.]

The idea of developing a planning sheet is introduced in the Planning module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of students sharing their ‘top tips’ for learning is introduced in the Capitalising module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

And the idea of students taking stock of what they need to find out is introduced in the Capitalising module, section 2, iv) Moving Beyond Green.

Image result for find out

The idea of expanding their understanding of ‘good noticing’ and ‘good listening’ (attentiveness) is explored in the Noticing and Listening modules, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

eagle

 

2.3. Broaden the language by noticing action across more learning behaviours.

I use language to suggest students slow down in order to notice and appraise the strategies and steps they are using in learning across a broadening range of learning behaviours.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

Here you are slowing things down just a little in order to draw students’ attention to their own use of a learning behaviour. You are saying, for example, ‘how did you do that?’ which encourages students to slow down, notice and appraise steps and strategies. Or, ‘what would have made that easier for you?’ which encourages looking for alternative ways of proceeding.

A key teaching strategy

The questions in the panel alongside illustrate the kinds of things that teachers can encourage students to pay attention to. Instead of skipping quickly to ‘the right answer’ they are asked to slow down and notice and appraise strategies and steps they are using along the way. This helps students become more reflective and thoughtful about their own learning. They are being encouraged to explore and compare different strategies for making progress. This helps them become more flexible and resourceful in the face of difficulty, and get into the habit of looking for alternative ways of proceeding if their first tack turns out not to work. They are being encouraged to develop the habit of thinking for themselves about what helpful knowledge or strategies they might already possess that could help them out in this situation, and thus to become more independent and resourceful.

View the page

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of written and oral feedback on learning behaviours is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

Screen Shot 2017-01-25 at 11.09.23

All modules, section 2, i) / ii) / iii) / iv) conclude the ‘More ideas to choose from’ section with ideas for teacher talk and if/then targets that are learning behaviour specific and tailored to the phase of development.

 

STAGE 3 Deepen understanding of the how of learning.

I use the progression charts to enrich my own learning language for the broader range of learning behaviours. I ensure my feedback encourages reflection on the ‘what’ and ‘how’ of achievement and links their use of learning behaviours to their curriculum success. I encourage learners to keep learning journals / logs to plot their use of learning behaviours.

As a result, my students understand learning across a broader range of behaviours and grow a sense of progression through their learning language.

3.1. Deepen your lexicon of learning language.

I deepen and expand how I talk about learning by using / referencing appropriate levels of the progression charts for all learning behaviours.

Me Learning (Meta-learning)_2.xls_Page_01

More detail...

What’s happening here?

As you begin to introduce and use more of the learning behaviours you will need to find out more about how they grow and how to use them in your teaching. A quick way to find this information, and indeed broaden the way you’re able to talk about learning, is to refer to the progression charts for each behaviour. Here you will find a rich set of statements that will give you all sorts of ideas for developing questions and conversations about aspects and stages of a learning behaviour.

A key teaching strategy

Meta-learning involves drawing out of your learning experience a more general, explicit understanding of the process of learning, and specific knowledge about yourself as a learner. Let’s take these two aspects of meta-learning in turn.

There is a wealth of research which shows that good learners know a lot about learning.

They possess a vocabulary for talking about the process of learning itself, and are able to articulate how learning works.

Good readers, even quite young ones, are often able tell you half-a-dozen things they can do when they come across an unfamiliar word: they sound it out, break it down into bits, re-read the previous sentence, read on to see if the meaning becomes clear, look at the picture and think about it, and so on. And so, more generally, for good learners. The more able they are to talk about their learning, the more likely they are to be able to apply their knowledge to new domains too: meta-learning increases generalisation.

And good learners also need an accurate sense of themselves as learners. Being a good learner means being able to take your own strengths and weaknesses into account as you are weighing up a learning challenge, or deciding on a course of ‘professional development.’

The skills and dispositions of meta-learning can be cultivated simply by a teacher’s persistent use of questions such as ‘How did you go about finding that out?’ or ‘How would you go about teaching that to other people?’

This idea is introduced in the Phase 2 Meta Learning module, section 1.

Me Learning (Meta-learning)_2.xls_Page_01

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of using progression ladders to deepen the language of progression is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

View ladders for all 12 learning behaviours

To deepen understanding of listening/hearing/noticing, go to the Listening module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

Image result for odd one out

 

3.2. Deepen understanding of learning by reflecting at a distance.

I encourage and enable students to use Learning Journals / Logs to capture their learning journey and recognise new understandings about their learning.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

By now it’s a good idea to involve students in reflecting on their learning behaviours. Introducing learning scrapbooks has proved useful; indeed research showed secondary science students showed dramatic improvements, the journals helping them to develop more sophisticated conceptions of learning. Ask your students to record their thoughts and strategies for learning which they can refer back to at any time. It works best when they are given freedom about what and how to record, but encouragement to include text, diagrams, pictures and examples of the behaviours in action seals success.

A key teaching strategy

Using learning power scrapbooks

to build self-awareness and capture behaviours. Here students record their thoughts, feelings, and progress about learning. Some schools use the more formalised learning log pages from TLO’s on-line Transition Activity Bank. Different pages prompt students to notice themselves using a learning behaviour over the course of a week—at school, at home, and elsewhere—and to note briefly what they did. For example, for Making Links they might note; ‘When I built on the knowledge I already had’, ‘When I used an analogy to better understand something’, ‘When I met something new and asked myself how is this the same, and how is it different from things I already know?’

The idea of using learning journals is expanded on in the Revising module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of exploring the learning behaviours of ‘experts’ is introduced in the Capitalising module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

For a wide variety of strategies for exploring the nature of planning, go to the Planning module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

 

3.3. Deepen understanding of learning using feedback on both content and process.

I offer encouraging feedback on both the completed Task, the effectiveness of the Process and how the process has been Self-Regulated.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

Here you are looking at learning in the round by offering feedback on three aspects of learning. The point here is to support the student in the use of their learning behaviours. It involves prompting students in three ways; how well the task has been done, the dispositions or learning behaviours the student used, and encouraging their self-motivation.

A key teaching strategy

Encouraging feedback to support the use of learning behaviours

The idea of using Task, Process and Self-Regulation levels of feedback is explored in the Perseverance module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of nudging students to reflect on their learning behaviours is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

The idea of noticing the successful learning behaviours of others is introduced in the Capitalising module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

 

 

STAGE 4 Embed the language for effective independent learning.

I use ‘could be’ language to build thoughtful, imaginative, critical thinking and use peer assessment as a vehicle for students to offer each other constructive feedback and help each other to improve.

As a result, my students can accurately reflect on and discuss how effectively they are learning as they now have fluency in the language of learning.

4.1. Embed a rich language of learning to promote inquisitive learning.

I use ‘Could-be’ language to enable students to be more thoughtful, imaginative and critical. I invite them to be more inquisitive members of a knowledge-checking, knowledge-developing community.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

Using ‘could-be’ language encourages a more genuine engagement with what is being taught and learned. It affects how students will question and solve problems more readily because you present the knowledge more provisionally.’ Is’ language is full of certainty; everything is complete and definitive. ‘Could-be’ language is more tentative and provisional; it leaves open the possibility that things aren’t all cut-and-dried. ‘Is language’ positions students as ‘knowledge consumers’; ‘Could-be language’ invites students to be more thoughtful, critical or imaginative about what they are reading or listening to. Although much of the curriculum seems cut and dried we need to help students discover how to function intelligently in zones of contest and uncertainty. Teaching in this way will change not only the words you use but also the tone you adopt.

A key teaching strategy

Using ‘Could be’ language

The importance of using ‘Could-Be’ language is well researched. It encourages more genuine engagement with what is being taught; how students will question and solve problems more readily if knowledge is presented as provisional. It’s about shifting the tone to more tentative, less cut and dried. The opposite is ‘Is’ language which positions the learner as knowledge consumers where their job is to try and understand and remember. ‘Could be’ language immediately invites students to be more thoughtful, critical or imaginative about what they are hearing or reading.
For more on using ‘could be’ language, see page 69-71 in The Learning Powered School.

Could be language includes phrase like;

  • In most cases
  • may on occasion
  • wide variety
  • could be
  • probably
  • possibly
  • most often
  • there are other ways
  • one of which
  • some people think that…

If you say definitively that something is the case, students take it literally and try to remember it. But if you say, of the same thing, that it could be the case, they become more engaged, more thoughtful, more imaginative, and more critical. That ‘could be’ invites students to become more active, inquisitive members of the knowledge-checking, knowledge-developing community, rather than to see themselves as merely doing their best to understand and remember something that is already cut and dried.

The illustration alongside shows an example of how textbook knowledge, which is often presented as cut-and-dried, brook-no-questions language, can be softened and made more conditional, tentative, or open in a variety of simple ways.

View the page

The idea of using ‘Could Be’ languaage is introduced in the Imagining module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of developing critical curiosity is introduced in the Questioning module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

A couple of VTRs to support knowledge checking are introduced in the Reasoning module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

 

4.2. Embed language that enables students to reflect profitably on others’ learning.

I introduce peer assessment / critique and emphasise the language of being Kind, Specific and Helpful. I ensure all students benefit from being taught how to help each other improve.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

For much of the time you do most of the talking in helping others to learn. But there are occasions when learners themselves can profitably join the endeavour, learn more about themselves as a learner and help others too. A technique known as ‘building a culture of critique’, made famous by educator Ron Berger, is an effective way of engaging students in effective learning talk with the added purpose of giving effective feedback. It takes a while to make it work effectively but it’s well worth the effort for everyone involved.

A key teaching strategy

Engage students giving feedback that is kind, specific and helpful

Ron Berger’s Ethic of Excellence

Build a culture of critique

Plan formal critique sessions, where students may show a piece of work, explaining their ideas and what they were trying to achieve. Students are then encouraged to critique the work, but using the rules that it must be:

  • Kind
  • Specific
  • Helpful

Students should be encouraged to phrase their critique as questions e.g. ‘Have you thought about…..?’ As a result of this feedback from their peers, students improve their work over time. This is demonstrated brilliantly, by this short video.

Just watch, be amazed and try similar approaches with students.

Search for Austin’s Butterfly to discover more detailed analysis of the Models of Excellence approach.

The idea of using peer feedback is introduced in the Revising module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of students presenting to a wider audience is introduced in the Revising module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

Further reading about peer assessment and peer review is introduced in the Revising module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

 

4.3. Embed the language and practice of self-nudging.

I create regular opportunities for students to evaluate their own and others’ work using constructive feedback. Talk Partners develop feedback processes to ensure a constructive and accurate exchange.

Image result for three stars and a wish

More detail...

What’s happening here?

Although we are raising this idea at stage 5 we recognise that you may have introduced the well-known ‘3 stars and a wish’ much earlier. However, what you are trying to do here is to enable students to become their own critical friend; a judge of their own learning and a fixer of their own learning problems. Over time you have given students a rich language of learning with words to describe and understand not only learning behaviours but how they are disposed to use them. Students can use this rich thinking and vocabulary to analyse their learning and themselves as a learner.

A key teaching strategy

Harness the power of 3 stars and a wish

The well-known Assessment for Learning technique of 3 stars and a wish is frequently used by teachers to fashion their feedback to learners, but here we are suggesting that learners use it themselves to structure feedback to each other. The strategy fits well with feedback that is Kind, Specific and Helpful as considered in ‘Austin’s Butterfly’.

But here you are playing a longer game. While in the early stages students give and receive feedback from their peers, you are really laying the foundations of students acting as their own ‘critical friend’, judging their own efforts (3 stars) and considering what more needs to be done (a wish). It is a shift of responsibility towards the learner to evaluate their efforts against the agreed success criteria and, eventually, against their own self-imposed standards.

This use of 3 Stars and a Wish was introduced in the Talking for Learning section of Playing the Learning Power Game.

Image result for three stars and a wish

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of teachers nudging meta learning is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

Image result for self reflection

The idea of students discussing and evaluating team and individual performance is introduced in the Collaboration module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

 

STAGE 5 Securing effective independent learners.

I talk fluently about learning itself using the language embedded in progression charts. I aim to deepen my own and my students’ understanding of learning by referencing media reports / articles / videos about learning from the world beyond school. My feedback covering content and process is acted on by all of us.

As a result, my students discuss learning with fluency and precision and understand how they can apply their learning behaviours in the real world.

5.1. Secure a rich learning language.

I use the language of learning fluently for the whole range of learning behaviours. This stimulates effective learning and ensures students imitate the use of learning-friendly language.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

Your students are now fully aware of themselves as learners, the learning behaviours they use, when they use them, what they find difficult about them or even how well they think they use them. Here you might use some Learning Wheels because they can support students in thinking through, either alone or with others, how well they use the behaviours. The resulting wheel patterns always cause lots of interest, debate and plans for improvement.

A key teaching strategy

Take the conversation to another level . . . .

Thus far students have been reflecting on whether and / or how frequently they have been using various learning behaviours. Use this Rating Wheel to get them reflecting on how well they have used these behaviours.

Challenge students to explain why they believe they have used the behaviour effectively. How could you use their answers to build definitions of effective learning behaviours?

Teacher talk

  • Which learning behaviours have you had occasion to use today/this week?
  • Which have you used most often?
  • I notice you have completely coloured in the reasoning segment. So what does that mean? What does good reasoning mean to you?
  • Which one of the learning behaviours do you want to improve and learn to do better?

A simple Rating Wheel to encourage students to consider how they have been learning is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

The Rating Wheel to encourage students to consider how well they have been learning is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of teachers ‘talking learnish’ is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

To deepen the understanding of the intricacies of planning, go to the Planning module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

 

5.2. Secure learning as a life skill by drawing on current accounts.

I feed students’ understanding of learning as a life skill using related media reports on brain, mind, visualisation and so forth.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

Of course classrooms aren’t the only place where learning takes place and much is still being researched about how learning happens, why it’s important and how best to go about it. For older students it’s important to stimulate interest in learning more widely and this is easy to do using material from the internet, newspapers, periodicals etc. The use and indeed dangers of AI is a hot topic that will influence and impact on everyone’s life from now on and will surely feature significantly in any discussion about learning.

Key teaching strategies.

For example…

a) Linking learning to life

Use articles to develop conversations about learning. Explore it as a subject of vital and ongoing research and interest.

For example the TES have recently had articles covering;

  • Why every school should (not) use setting. April 2024
  • Five ways to work with mistakes in the classroom. 23rd April 2024.
  • Revision strategies (that don’t involve highlighters)
  • Behaviour: why friends may matter more than teachers.

Recently THE ECONOMIST looked at;

  • The relationship between AI and humans.

Other recent articles we’ve found include;

  • https://wwwtelegraph.co.uk/ How AI is learning to read the human mind.
  • https://www.forbes.com 2023/05/25 How AI will revolutionise human learning – but not the way you think

Articles from pre Covid days include;

  • Which Is More Creative, the Arts or the Sciences?  Oct. 13, 2020 — An expert in creativity and innovation is calling for schools and universities to increase their emphasis on teaching creativity, as new research shows it is a core competency across all disciplines …

Use articles such as these (Science Daily) to develop conversations about learning.

b) Find professional articles for discussion with both colleagues and students

c) Find or make inspirational quotes about learning

Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice

  • Keep an eye on the newspapers and TV news.
  • Pintrest has lots of motivational stuff, but select with care!
  • Ted Talks are worth exploring on You Tube.

5.3. Secure the language of learning for life.

I continue to ensure that the development of students’ learning power focuses on the life skills of learning and becomes the mainstream thinking and functioning of the school.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

Building Learning Power has a clear, well-articulated vision of education as a preparation for living in a turbulent world, where the major challenges are those of dealing with high levels of uncertainty, complexity, opportunity and responsibility. In coping with this young people need to be helped to learn how to reason, imagine, persist, evaluate and collaborate; the life skills of learning which are a school’s business to concentrate on. Making it successful means working this philosophy and practice into the mainstream thinking of the school.

While these well-developed online tools and illustrations will help you to develop your teaching techniques, the best way of ensuring these work in changing the culture of the school, is by working collaboratively with colleagues.

Phase 1 of this programme offered carefully structured learning team meetings. Phase 2 has no given structure because the path you take will now be driven by the needs of students. But in order to ensure a wholistic approach, we urge you to continue using the learning team structure and agendas.

A key teaching strategy

Meet with colleagues to consider on-line materials and which to make use of.

Consider what you have each been trying out over the last month or so and what else you want to experiment with.

Try a PMI (Plus, minus, interesting) routine to help sort out your thinking.

Think about:

  • how the ideas would suit your students as learners
  • which are realistic both for you and your students
  • how the ideas would impact on your classroom culture and the students view of themselves as learners
  • which ideas are front runners and why?

Use the decision making pentagon for deciding what you might try. Note down a couple of:

  • things you want to start doing
  • things you think you need to stop doing (that’s harder)
  • things you want to keep doing
  • things you want to do more often
  • things you want to do less

Similar ideas to extend your thinking

Conduct a Learning Culture Review in your own classroom. If possible, discuss the outcomes with other colleagues – what is emerging from your reflections in relation to a) your own classroom, b) the school more widely?

Download the Learning culture review

Some schools are going further by looking at the school itself as a learning organisation. Download these 2 pages from ‘The Learning Powered School’ to gain a flavour of the questions that these schools are asking themselves. How would you answer them about your own school?

Download page 192 Download page 193

 

You are currently in the section ‘Talking for Learning’

Return to ‘the professional learning power game route map’Relating for LearningTalking for LearningConstructing LearningCelebrating Learning
Continue Reading

Relating for Learning

 

Return to ‘the professional learning power game route map’Relating for LearningTalking for LearningConstructing LearningCelebrating Learning

 

Ideas for developing students’ sense of autonomy in learning by gradually devolving responsibility to them

STAGE 1 Introduce four key learning behaviours.

I make learners aware of how, by using four of their learning behaviours, they can begin to take greater control of their own learning. I model being a learner, learning aloud and showing how to tackle things in front of them. I’m beginning to introduce a coaching approach to my teaching.

As a result, my students are aware of and motivated by opportunities to do more for themselves.

1.1. Introduce how to become aware of themselves learning.

I introduce students to simple self-monitoring tools which help them to become more aware of what’s happening as they learn. I endeavour to make being ‘stuck’ acceptable, normal and interesting.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

You are at the beginning of a long journey to bring learning to learn alive for students and in particular how you begin to hand over responsibility for learning to them. An early move may be to make students aware of what they do or how they are feeling when they are learning. It’s a gentle introduction to a complex process and the capacities they have within themselves to make it work.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 materials and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme.

A key teaching strategy

Help students become aware of their own learning.

Use laminated card and a clothes peg. Print on Absorbed – Distracted or Too Easy – Too Hard or Stuck – Doing Fine? Interested – Bored etc. Laminate and provide a peg. Have students use them during lessons to help them monitor and become more conscious of their feelings about learning. This is just a small beginning in devolving the responsibility for learning towards the learners.

This idea is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

Further Teaching Ideas

 

The idea of students self-monitoring learning is introduced in the Revising module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

The idea of structuring the classroom to encourage independence is introduced in the Capitalising module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

1.2. Introduce a coaching approach.

In coaching I resist offering solutions to problems, encouraging students to find answers within themselves. I offer students support to continue their thinking rather than just giving them the answers.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

Here you are at the beginning of your journey as a learning coach. It’s about you gradually moving away from giving all the answers and moving your students to a position where they can help themselves. It’s about enabling your students to see what they are doing more clearly and discovering ways to improve. This support to continue routine is an effective starting point.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 materials and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme.

A key teaching strategy

Nudging improvement in the skill: self-recovery from being ‘stuck’

Support to continue: questions not answers

If students freeze when they are stuck, offer supportive questions not answers. A basic support to continue is ‘What do you do next?’, and when this has been done ask the question again, and then again

Support to continue’ prompts are seen as helpful by students. You are encouraging them to take over the job themselves and reminding them that uncertainty shouldn’t lead to paralysis. It’s about weaning students off depending on you and activating their positive self-talk about learning.

The advantage of asking questions over telling is that you are in a better position to monitor how students are learning when they are doing the explaining.

The idea of Support to Continue is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of students explaining why they are stuck is also introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

Image result for because

The idea of coaching students to find things out for themselves is introduced in the Capitalising module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

1.3. Introduce modelling a way to do a task or carry out a skill.

I model or ‘learn aloud’ how to work out a problem. I explain the skill and then model how to use it, review it and evaluate it. I model how to use ‘new’ learning behaviours as a way of introducing them to students.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

Modelling is about you showing yourself as a learner. In these early phases you may be modelling what you might do when you get stuck or perhaps modelling being part of a team or modelling revising your own learning. You are showing how best to use the learning behaviours you are introducing. At this stage – persevering, questioning, collaborating and revising.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 materials and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme.

A key teaching strategy

Modelling ‘how to’

Whatever the subject, modelling ‘how to’ is given added value when linked to the learning behaviours that make for successful performance. Take on the role of an intelligent novice and model performance at a slightly higher, more coherent and informed level than is characteristic of your students. Model your ‘think alouds’.

Try the following steps for whatever skill you are modelling;

  • introduce the skill e.g. how to find something in an index;
  • explain the skill, explaining why the information is important;
  • model the skill, showing how you do it;
  • review what you have done, ask students to tell you what you did;
  • reflect on the use of the skill, where else the skill can be applied.

The idea of modelling ‘how to’ is explored in the Relating for Learning section of ‘Playing the Learning Power Game’.

 

 

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of modelling how you get yourself unstuck is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

The idea modelling and discussing distractions is introduced in the Noticing module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

Image result for being distracted

 

 

STAGE 2 Add a broader range of learning behaviours.

I’m gradually introducing students to a broader range of their learning behaviours. I’m able to model solving problems using more learning behaviours and I explain my feelings as I go along. I’m developing my coaching skills to help students voice their own questions and draw out meaning for themselves.

As a result, my students enjoy framing their own questions and learning to recognise they have responsibility and can take control of their learning.

2.1. Broaden students’ opportunities to use more of their learning behaviours.

I scan the curriculum for opportunities to introduce a broadening range of learning behaviours to students. Students gradually realise they have an array of capacities through which to control their own learning.

Screen Shot 2015-04-16 at 16.59.49

More detail...

What’s happening here?

We move on now to introducing more learning behaviours beyond the foundational four of Phase 1. This doesn’t mean students will be fully conversant with the original four but it allows you to bring more of the curriculum into play…it’s hard to do maths without using reasoning or creative writing without imagining! We leave it up to you which behaviours to add when and in what order, but students’ learning behaviour profiles and your curriculum plans should give you clues.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 materials and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme.

A key teaching strategy

Introduce a broader range of learning behaviours. For example, Listening:

Good listener prompts

Invite students make suggestions about good listening:

  • Pay attention. Focus on the person and what is being said
  • Don’t get distracted by other things around you
  • Show you’re listening by saying uh-huh or nodding your head
  • Keep quiet while the other person’s talking
  • Wait to ask a question or give comments that show others that you care about what they’re saying.

Make these into a public display and refer to them often. This is an example from a group of 9 year olds.

Teacher Talk

  • What have we learned about how to listen well from our listening challenges?
  • What do we need to remember to do to be a good listener?
  • What about looking at each other…
  • How might we show we are listening?
  • …and so on

The idea of students creating listening prompts is introduced in the Listening module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

Screen Shot 2015-04-16 at 16.59.49

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of building in wait time was explored in Playing the Learning Power Game, and is also in the Questioning module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

Image result for wait time

Ideas for introducing students to additional learning behaviours are included in section 2 i), Grey to Purple, of all Phase 2 modules.

For example, go to the Noticing module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple, for multiple activities / ideas to introduce Attentive Noticing.

 

2.2. Develop coaching students to manage a broader range of learning behaviours.

I extend my coaching approaches across a broader range of learning behaviours. I help students to re-frame their experiences so that they can draw out meaning for themselves.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

Here you are using your coaching approach across the much broader range of learning behaviours. You might use coaching to help students re-frame challenge or getting stuck. Or, you could use it to introduce new learning behaviours such as planning or noticing into the mix.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 materials and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme

A key teaching strategy

Re-frame challenge: explore learning how to overcome a struggle

Use the ‘Learning Pit’ as a means of opening up a conversation around the feelings involved when struggling with learning, and the journey to overcoming the struggle. It is essential that students know:

  • that the ‘pit’ is only one staging post on the learning journey
  • they can get out by using ‘stuck strategies’ and tools

It is also worth noting that the pit is not necessarily inevitable for all students in all learning – some will fly over the pit in some topics or curriculum areas.

The ability to cope with and overcome difficulty and challenge is a key aspect to becoming a successful learner.

James Nottingham introduced the idea of the Learning Pit as a way to explain that struggling is part of learning and that if we are to understand something we need to struggle with it first. Students move from unconsciously incompetent (an emotionally ‘safe’ area before learning), to consciously incompetent (the emotionally tricky “pit”), to consciously competent (the far side, after the learning has happened).

Find out more by visiting:

https://www.learningpit.org/

The idea of the learning pit is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

 

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of using Think Pair Share to develop student coaching skills is introduced in the Listening module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

think share pair 2

To coach students to use their imagination skills by engaging all of their senses, go to the Imagining module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

b and w

2.3. Broaden modelling to use the uncertain thinking in tackling problems.

I demonstrate tackling things that appear difficult. I share uncertainties and explore different learning behaviours that might be needed. I make my thinking visible and explain my feelings throughout the process.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

Effectively this is about you modelling just about any learning behaviour. The context for this modelling will be important. You might use modelling as a way of introducing a new learning behaviour or, you might use modelling to illustrate using just an aspect of a behaviour. Modelling being a learner becomes part of how you are as a teacher.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 materials and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme

A key teaching strategy

Modelling uncertain thinking

The attitudes, values and interests that you display in the classroom, knowingly or not, constitute arguably the most powerful medium through which the messages of learning rub off on students. To encourage students to engage in the effort necessary in rising to challenge, you need to externalise your exploratory thinking; thinking through a problem out loud:

  • demonstrate the habit and inclinations of a good learner
    • What’s this problem about?
    • Have I seen/done one like this before?
    • What am I trying to achieve?
    • How will I know when I have achieved what I need to do?
    • So, how might I set about it?
  • talk about the challenges you have faced and how you overcome them
    • What happens if I do xxx or yyy?
    • Does that work?
    • Why not?
    • What else could I try?
    • OK that seems to work so what’s the next step?
  • show that you too have to put in effort to be successful
    • I’ve re-done that bit a couple of times but it’s still not looking as good/sound/right as I think it should.
    • What else could I try?
    • Ahh! that’s looking/feeling/behaving better now.
    • I think that’s going to work
  • show interest in the mistakes you make
    • Oh! what’s happened here?
    • Why doesn’t that work?
    • That’s interesting. I’ll need to remember that for next time.
    • but that mistake has got me thinking about…..

At this stage modelling moves up a notch from showing how to do something correctly to explaining how you are thinking through the problem in order to get it right.

Modelling being stuck is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of modelling how you link things together is introduced in the Making Links module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

The idea modelling your own learning behaviours is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

 

 

STAGE 3 Deepen understanding of the how of learning.

I build students’ curiosity about how they are learning by giving them opportunities to monitor and evaluate their learning, modelling a broader range of positive learning behaviours and offering opportunities to experience self-guided activities.

As a result, my students become motivated by opportunities to develop their learning habits and enjoy their teachers standing back to let them ‘get on with it’.

3.1. Deepen students’ experience of monitoring learning behaviours.

I encourage students to monitor and evaluate their use of an increasing variety of learning behaviours. I harness their motivation by encouraging their use of tools like ‘If-Then’ planning.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

If you want your students to change their behaviours you’ll need to help them to think much more closely about the ‘hows’ and the ‘whats’. As it happens motivation research has come up with an effective solution called ‘If-then’ planning. It’s worked so well in schools that have tried it that we have included it as one of the ‘really useful’ ideas to try.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 materials and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme

A key teaching strategy

Putting ‘If-then’ planning into action.

If we want students to change their behaviour we need to help them to think much more closely about the ‘hows’ and the ‘whats’. Motivation research proposes an effective solution to this called ‘If-then’ planning. ‘Ifs’ are the situations you want to remind yourself about. ‘Thens’ are what you will do about something; the action you will take. Brainstorm a list of the ‘what we might do in response to the Ifs’.

Research findings

Research on motivation and goals from Harvard University shows how our brains work to achieve our goals. Basically it says that goals need to be very clear and our brain ignores a goal if it’s unclear about what to do. Brains act on goals only when what to do is clear. So, goals like ‘Lose weight’ or ‘Exercise more often‘ or even ‘I want to feel ok about being stuck‘ are too nebulous. They beg the question ‘how’ or ‘what do I do?’

The how to ‘If-then’ planning

When setting a goal you need to specify not only what you will do but also where and when you will do it.

If (or when) [___situation__], then I will do [___behaviour__] So a goal about losing weight, your brain would need to know much more about the ‘how’ and the ‘what’ of losing weight. An If-then statement or goal might be ‘If I get the pudding menu, then I’ll ask for coffee’.

This may sound a bit cumbersome to start with but research suggests far more goals are achieved by using ‘if-then’ planning. And the clever bit is that this builds self-talk at the same time. You do what you are telling yourself to do. The ‘if-then’ plan succeeds because the situation and the action become linked in the mind. The brain recognises the situation as an opportunity to advance the goal. When the situation is detected action is initiated automatically. “If-then’ plans become “instant habits”.

If/Then planning is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of students self-checking their work is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

Screen Shot 2016-05-09 at 13.56.32

The idea of challenging students to consider how they might go about finding something out is introduced in the Capitalising module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

3.2. Deepen coaching approaches to raise curiosity in the learning.

I help students to become intrigued about their own learning by raising questions to explore how learning is working and offering opportunities for them to experience self-guided activities.

Learning about Imagining

More detail...

What’s happening here?

The picture alongside shows a learning mat, a simple but effective tool, often placed on tables, to remind students to monitor their use of particular behaviours; in this case those associated with meta-learning. But similarly you as a teacher might use them to support your coaching by turning any of these statements into a coaching question: ‘Did it turn out how you expected it to?’ ‘What other possibilities did you consider, and why did you reject them?’ ‘What makes this original?’. In designing sophisticated learning mats you have made yourself a useful coaching tool.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 materials and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme

A key teaching strategy

Learning Mats… a simple tool to encourage students to become more self-aware of how they are using a learning habit. An A3 or A4 laminated sheet kept on tables or used as part of a wall display. Shows various aspects of a learning habit.

Students:

  • refer to them during lessons;
  • use them as prompts;
  • use them as self-assessment tools;
  • use them as reflection tools;
  • join in meta-cognitive talk.

Teachers can use them as an audit tool to support their planning. i.e. which of the skills are implied in the lesson plan and therefore how will they be surfaced in what you draw attention to and how you orchestrate the lesson.

Download the Imagining Mat

 

Learning Mats appear in all modules, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green. The one illustrated here is in the Imagining module.

 

Learning about Imagining

Further Teaching Ideas

A stimulus for coaching students to improve their collaborative beheviours is introduced in the Collaboration module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

[This approach could, of course, be applied to all of the learning behaviours. Just construct your own behaviour checklist from the relevant progression chart.]

A range of classroom strategies that can form a basis for coaching conversations is introduced in the Capitalising module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

Screen Shot 2016-07-22 at 11.08.24

 

3.3. Model a deeper range of learning behaviours.

I model the use and value of a range of learning behaviours drawn from progression maps as I introduce and promote them as useful learning strategies.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

In this phase you’ll be introducing students to a further eight learning capacities. While explaining the overall behaviour may be straightforward it’s often a good idea to isolate and model some of the deeper skills that are embedded in and part of the behaviour as a whole. Here we have isolated some of the skills of planning and coupled them with collaboration. Much of your modelling beyond this stage will be associated with tricky aspects of a whole behaviour.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 materials and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme.

A key teaching strategy

Show yourself as a good planner

Students learn by imitating others and so will learn much from absorbing your own planning skills.

Try setting up a challenge that requires students to create a plan of action and join in the group as a learner, without taking over or leading the activity;

During the challenge try to act out some of these positive learning behaviours:

  • organising what needs to be done in what order – what must we do? what must we do first? second?;
  • deciding success criteria – how will we know if our plan is working?;
  • thinking about how long it will take – how long do we think this will take us?;
  • agreeing milestones and how the plan will be monitored – when will we stop to see how things are going?;
  • deciding who will be doing what – who will take the lead on this?;
  • looking out for possible sticking points / obstacles – what might get in the way?;
  • keeping an eye to ensure the emerging plan meets the original objectives – are we still on track?

These ideas are introduced in the Planning module, sections 1 and 2. Start here for more about Planning and how it develops.

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of teachers modelling and students responding to the visible thinking routine ‘What makes you say that?’ is introduced in the Reasoning module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

The idea of modelling how you deal with challenge is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

 

STAGE 4 Embed opportunities for independent learning.

I offer opportunities to experience open-ended activities and encourage students to tackle more ‘wild’ tasks without predictable outcomes. I support them in coaching each other and explaining their thought processes.

As a result, my students become motivated by opportunities to pursue their own lines of enquiry and draw confidence from coaching themselves and each other.

4.1. Embed experience of self-guided activities to students.

I offer students opportunities to tackle ‘wild’ rather than ‘tame’ tasks and expect them to develop their own high level goals and success criteria.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

By this stage, when you think your students are confident enough to try something a bit more edgy you might introduce a ‘wild’ task. ‘Wild’ tasks have no pre-determined outcomes, and give learners free rein to explore areas of their own interest. Not for every day, and students need to be equipped with sufficient goal setting, planning and revising habits before these tasks will work. But introducing ‘Wild’ tasks is an important step in letting go of the reins.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 materials and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme.

A key teaching strategy

Designing ‘wild tasks’.

What if we occasionally designed tasks that are ‘wild’, that have no pre-determined outcomes, that give learners free rein to explore areas of their own interest?

  • Begin by asking students to identify questions to which they would like to know the answer – as one school calls them, ‘big awe and wonder questions’.
  • Sift them so that everyone chooses from a range of questions that the class consider of greatest interest rather than allow complete freedom of choice.
  • Students then design and undertake their own enquiry into their preferred area of interest as a home learning project.

Not for every day AND remember that you can’t start this sort of discovery task until students are equipped with sufficient goal setting, planning and revising habits.

Here’s a classical word problem that could act as a way into Wild Tasks. Why not have one a week and let students become intrigued.

The broken egg problem.

A farmer is taking her eggs to the market when her cart hits a pothole. The cart tips over and every egg is broken. For insurance purposes she needs to know how many eggs she had. Unfortunately she doesn’t know, but remembers something from various ways she tried packing the eggs. When she put the eggs in groups of two, three, four, five and six, there was one egg left over, but when she put them in groups of seven they ended up in complete groups with no eggs left over.

What can the farmer figure out from this information about the number of eggs she had? Is there more than one answer?

The idea of linking open-ended tasks with the Questionn Formulation Technique is explored in the Reasoning module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

Further Teaching Ideas

To support student planning skills, introduce FAME planning (focus/aim/monitor/evaluate) as introduced in the Planning module, section 2, iii) Moving blue to Green.

 

 

Deepen this with Future Based Planning, introduced in the Planning module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

Image result for FAME

Image result for target

The visible thinking routine Stop Look Listen is introduced in the Noticing module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

 

4.2. Embed training for students as coaches.

I train students to give effective feedback to each other. e.g. listening to gain insight, questions to open dialogue and how to offer non-judgemental feedback to each other.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

By this stage you will have introduced, to some extent at least, all the learning capacities your students will need to become successful learners. Throughout much of this journey you have been playing the role of a learning coach nudging your students to help themselves. This now seems an appropriate time to introduce these skills to your students to help them become their own teachers. This won’t happen overnight, indeed, this sort of self-help regime will need to continue across all subjects for years to ensure competence and success.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 materials and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme.

A key teaching strategy

Train students as learning coaches

You are already a skilful coach, but the next step is to train your students to coach each other, using the same techniques that you use. Peer coaching is a beginning, but ideally you are seeking to help students, in the long term, to be able to coach themselves.

Teach your students to coach each other. Coaching is basically a structured conversation where one person, the coach, helps the other person, the coachee, to find out their own answers. The coach asks questions and listens but does not offer suggestions.

The GROW structure is widely used —

  • set the Goal..“What is it that you want to do?”
  • find out the Reality“What’s it like at the moment?”
  • think of Options“What might you do to improve?”
  • commit to the Way forward“So what are you going to do and when are you going to do it?”

Try organising speed coaching between students lasting 10 minutes each way – it can be really effective.

This, and further ideas, can be found in the Revising module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of training students as learning coaches can be found in the Listening module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

Image result for coaching

The listening skills for effective coaching is introduced in the Listening module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

4.3. Embed the skill of modelling in students.

I encourage students to model and explain their thoughts and thinking processes clearly to others.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

By this stage you will first be showing and then encouraging you students to ‘show’ or ‘explain’ by modelling what they do. In other words your students are slowly understanding themselves as a learner and are able to pass on hints and tips to others. They might be confident to show or explain how they do something, they may want to share how they research a topic or how they say or play something. You are creating a classroom full of confident learners all helping each other to learn. It takes a while but becomes very powerful.

A key teaching strategy

First steps in helping students to model their thinking.

Get into the habit of asking students to tell their partner what they are thinking and, whenever possible, to describe and explain why they are thinking it.

The role of the partner is to get their partner to model their thinking, and to probe this thinking with ‘why’ type questions. The right ‘probe’ questions will move the response from being a description to being an explanation. The routine encourages students to explore and talk about what they are thinking, thereby surfacing that which is frequently sub-conscious. The more you become conscious of what you think and/or do the stronger and more routine it will become.

Encourage this process with ‘why’ questions such as;

  • Can you describe this …?
  • Why has it got a….?
  • Why does it look like that?
  • Why is it made of…?

Helping learners to move from Describing to Explaining is introduced in the Reasoning module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.

Further Teaching Ideas

The use of ‘Point, Evidence, Explain’ and ‘Why do you say that?’ are introduced in the Reasoning module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.

A strategy to encourage students to notice subtle detail and to generate and share their hypotheses is introduced in the Noticing module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

STAGE 5 Securing effective independent learners.

I now act as a learning coach in my interactions with students, offering more opportunities for students to undertake longer-term, open ended activities independently. When necessary I model being a learner of my teaching craft and of my subject.

As a result, my students are motivated to achieve their own goals, learn confidently and interdependently and seek support only when necessary.

5.1. Secure greater student responsibility for learning.

I offer students frequent opportunities to experience; open-ended activities, spend longer on tasks and to decide on admissible outcomes. Students are coming to realise they are in-charge of their own learning.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

You are letting go of the reins. Your students now have many if not all of the skills and attitudes to manage their own learning. In this final stage it’s about keeping close to the learning culture you have created and ensuring learners retain self-sufficiency. You should have done enough by now to avoid them ever sliding back.

Below you will find references to key ideas you may have already met in Phase 1 materials and some further ideas from Phase 2 of the programme.

A key teaching strategy

Designing tasks to encourage independence.

In order to help learners to become increasingly independent and self-sufficient, you’ll need to design tasks that, over time, afford learners opportunities to do more for themselves as the teaching scaffold is slowly reduced.

In the early stages, tasks may be highly structured with the whole class following a path pre-determined by the teacher. As the amount of teacher direction reduces, you may still set the agenda and provide the necessary resources to answer the questions that they set, but how the questions are to be tackled is beginning to shift towards the learner-controlled enquiry. At the level of guided enquiry, you will still identify the topic / area of study, but learners decide how to tackle it. And at the level of free, independent enquiry, learners determine the area of study and how they wish to pursue it.

Ask yourself the hard questions:

  • Which type(s) of enquiry are evident in your classroom?
  • How could you begin to gradually shift task design away from Structured Enquiry and towards Free Enquiry?
  • Think about the oldest students in your school – which level of Enquiry might they be capable of working at? How will you plan, at whole-school level, to achieve this?

This, and other linked ideas, appear in the Capitalising/Resourcing module, section 2, iv) Moving Beyond Green.

Further Teaching Ideas

The idea of encouraging students to seek the advice of experts is introduced in the Capitalising module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

Strategies for dealing with a serious ‘stuck’ problem are introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

learning unstuck growth mindset

5.2. Secure student fluency in various coaching styles.

I aim to help students to develop and adapt their coaching style to enable them to respond to different coaching needs. E.g. sometimes to inspire, sometimes to direct or to guide, and sometimes to delegate responsibility.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

The skill of helping others to help themselves lies at the heart of coaching and over the last few stages you have been using this approach and even introducing it to your students. Two factors are critical in how people approach their development…their level of skill and their motivation, hence there’s a need to develop and adapt coaching styles to accommodate different coaching needs. We have found this Skill/Will model useful for both teachers and older students helping them to coach themselves or each other

A key teaching strategy

Students as coaches

Use the ‘Skill: Will’ matrix to help students develop ways of reflecting on their own performance. Using the matrix helps students judge their levels of accomplishment and motivation in any area of the curriculum or indeed life beyond school. Students can support or coach each other to complete the grid objectively and then identify for themselves small steps to create the desired movement. Each of the quadrants requires a different coaching approach.

  • Direct – set short-term goals, structure learning tasks and monitor progress closely.
  • Inspire – re-kindle interest, set short term actions and accentuate positives.
  • Guide – envision the future when skill levels are raised, secure appropriate learning opportunities and provide reflective feedback.
  • Delegate – encourage experimentation and further challenges to maintain interest.

See extracts below from pages 106 and 107 in The Learning Powered School.

Students’ coaching partnerships

As students develop their reciprocal skills of empathy, listening, collaborating, and so on, some schools take coaching a stage further and develop students to act as their own coach and as coaches for each other. At North Oxfordshire Academy, and indeed elsewhere, students have been explicitly trained to understand what coaches do and apply that understanding to themselves. They develop ways of reflecting on their own performance that enables them to design their own ‘exercise regimes’. Students use the familiar Skill: Will matrix—as Tom did in the diagram opposite—and note down how they respond to different aspects of their lives in school and beyond, judging separately their levels of accomplishment and motivation in each area. Tom looks at one aspect of his school life (in this case maths) that he wants to shift from one quadrant to another. In the top right quadrant Tom captures areas of Maths which he considers he is skilled in and is motivated to do. In the bottom right he notes those aspects which he is keen on but needs more assistance. In the top left he notes those aspects which he is skilled in but not interested in. In the bottom left he records those aspects that he is really challenged by and doesn’t enjoy. Another student coach may support him in seeing his grid objectively and identifying, for himself, small steps that are designed to create the desired movement. The skill-will matrix gives an insight into how varying levels of skill and motivation call for different coaching styles. Things in Tom’s bottom left quadrant need a very different coaching style to those in the top right.

Further Teaching Ideas

Further ideas can be found in the Revising module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.

Further ideas can be found in the Listening module, section 2, iv) Moving Beyond Green.

 

5.3. Secure student fluency in a range of modelling styles.

I show myself as confident finder outer, willing to own up to ignorance, uncertainty and mistakes. I have become fluent in working through the uncertain thinking of challenges in front of students and I’m encouraging students to do likewise.

More detail...

What’s happening here?

In effect this is the destination of a long and worthwhile journey. You have turned yourself into a confident learner who is willing to show and share the difficulties of learning and the triumphs of overcoming them. Not only that, by your careful guidance your students too are fast becoming skilful, confident learners. You balance your time between your own learning and performance zones.

A key teaching strategy

Learning about the craft of teaching.

Research shows that after the first couple of years working in a profession, performance usually plateaus. This has been shown to be true in teaching, general medicine, nursing and other fields, and it happens because once we think we have become good enough, adequate, then we stop spending time in the learning zone. We focus all our time on just doing our job, performing, which turns out not to be a great way to improve. But the people who continue to spend time in the learning zone do continue to always improve.

Ask yourself the hard questions:

  • Am I as good a teacher as I want / hope to be?
  • Do I spend sufficient time in my own professional learning zone?
  • How effectively do I model to my own students that I am still learning about the craft of the classroom?
  • How do I create, for my professional self, low-stakes islands in otherwise high stakes seas?

The Ted Talk, How to get better at the things you care about, was introduced in phase 1 Playing the Learning Power Game, is mentioned in the Celebrating section of this module, and is explored in depth in the phase 2 Listening module, section 3. In all cases it was in relation to supporting students to understand the difference between their learning and performance zones.

Listen again, but this time through the lens of your own development as a teacher. After all – if teachers are not keen on lifelong learning, why should our students buy into the idea?

Watch the Ted Talk Read the Ted Talk

 

Further Teaching Ideas

For more ideas about modelling yourself as a learner, read pages 80 to 83 of ‘The Learning Powered School’.

Read pages 80 to 82 View page 83

A strategy for modelling how you make good decisions is introduced in the Capitalising module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.

Image result for good choices

 

You are currently in the section ‘Relating for Learning’

Return to ‘the professional learning power game route map’Relating for LearningTalking for LearningConstructing LearningCelebrating Learning

 

Continue Reading

Section 4: Team reflection and planning

Session agenda

1. Session objectives.

What do we want to achieve? (5 mins)

2. Sharing classroom experiments.

How did our experiments go? (20 mins)

Share

  • the changes in practice you tried
  • the changes in classroom culture you were hoping to achieve
  • how students reacted
  • what you learned
  • what next as a result

Probe

  • what was getting in the way?
  • what seemed difficult?
  • what would make it easier?
  • what made it work particularly well?
  • why was it successful?
  • changes in your behaviour

Impact

  • More/renewed interest in…..
  • Avoidance of…..
  • Improvements in……
  • Increases in…….
  • Little or no changes in…

3. Recapping on-line materials.

What did we think of the materials? ( 15 mins)

Reactions to

  • The Imagining progression grid
  • Where students are secure
  • Where students could be secure when they leave our school
  • Classroom culture ideas
  • Activities and talk ideas

4. Planning what to do.

What do we need to do next? ( 10 mins )

Decide

  • Which ideas should we all adopt as a school strategy?
  • How the progression of Imagining should be built across the school. ie how the phases of Imagining might play out against key stages and even year groups.

5. Personal action planning.

What am I going to do? ( 20 mins )

5a.Consider

  • How you want your pupils to improve/develop/enhance their approach to Imagining?
  • What are you going to do to bring this about?
  • How you want to consolidate/develop your classroom culture for imagining?
  • What you are going to do to bring this about?
  • develop your enquiry question.

Think of it like this…
If I do  XXXX will it improve/develop/enhance YYYY
This is the crunch question. Your pupils are unlikely to change unless you change!

Capture your learning enquiry as a question

Developing-an-enquiry-question-Imagining

Developing-an-enquiry-question-Imagining.pdf

Put a short enquiry plan together
Personal Action Plan-Imagining

Personal-Action-Plan-Imagining.pdf

Improvement indicators to consider for Imagining

Purple (Show me. Tell me)

  • Increased involvement in imaginative play
  • Greater awareness of other’s feelings/viewpoints
  • Correct use of the word ‘imagination’
  • Increased willingness to talk about their imagination

Blue (I’ll try)

  • Willingness to accept others’ ‘crazy’ imaginative ideas
  • Fewer predictable outcomes
  • Greater use of ‘what if?’ questions
  • Less self-conscious about their ideas

Green (I see why)

  • Greater frequency of empathetic responses
  • Lessening of inhibitive thoughts when thinking imaginatively
  • Strengthening of visualisations for what they want to achieve
  • Increasing accessibility of state of reverie

Yellow (I’ll make sure that I do)

  • Organises an effective catalogue of triggers of their imagination
  • Wider range of really original ideas emerging
  • Greater ability to create new rules
  • Rehearses actions effectively in the mind
  • Increased frequency in using imagination to take risks

6. Evaluate team session

How did we do as a team? ( 5 mins )

  • Did we achieve our objectives?
  • Are we comfortable with what we are trying to achieve?
  • Any concerns at this point?
  • Next meeting date and time.
Continue Reading

Section 3: Blending Imagining with content

So far, you have:

  • Looked at your students through the lens of the Imagining learning chart
  • Gained a sense of what becoming better at Imagining looks like
  • Explored a range of ideas and activities that will help to engage students with Imagining

Now we look closely at how to blend improving students’ imagining into the content you have to teach.

A. The principles behind any learning powered lesson

B. Big questions to ask about lesson design

C. Lesson planning in action…an exemplar imagining focused task

Learning habits form through use and practice, but desirable habits survive and flourish better if students are aware of them, realise their value and strive to improve them. The curriculum through its lessons provides the rich and varied occasions for exercising learning habits.

A. The principles behind any learning powered lesson

Think of yourself as a learning power coach, helping your students to help themselves to develop their learning habits. Hence your lessons are much more likely to contain challenges and activities that get your students thinking and learning for themselves. You encourage students to explore challenging questions, problems or assertions and become observers of their own learning. You step back from telling and heavy scaffolding and instead try to mobilise your students’ learning behaviours. You are organising learning to let them take the strain.

Open Me

The SIX principles that lie behind teaching for learning power

1: Visible learning…Surfacing learning

You make it clear to students which learning habits and processes they are using. You try to make every aspect of the learning process as visible as possible through the language you use and through the words and images you display on the walls.

For example: 

Create a setting where students are more likely to engage the imagination and wonder.

Give the students the opportunity to ‘incubate’ their ideas, e.g. change the ‘home corner’ into a ‘Creativity Corner’ by dint of making a dark tent with a black sheet, decked out with fairy lights and CDs of relaxing music.

Designate a table for a ‘Clever Creations’ display. Each week display different things the students have made during the week, an unusual lego structure, a play dough pot or a painting. Celebrate these pieces  and award ‘Good imagination’ badges/stickers.

2: Dual focus teaching…blending content and process

You design activities that combine the dual objectives of ‘what’ will be learned and ‘how’ it will be learned. You make sure students know that the content they are learning is a way of giving their minds a useful workout. (The content is the vehicle for learning)

For example: 

  • Introduce surprising and unpredictable elements into lessons

  • Link experiences to life across and beyond the curriculum

  • Design extended learning opportunities

  • Welcome unlikely and unusual suggestions

  • Allow time for group explorations of possibilities

  • Provide rich and varied stimuli 

  • Demonstrate your own creativity

3: Emotional engagement…Capturing attention

Your lessons are designed to intrigue your students. Students don’t put in the effort unless their energy and attention are captured by what they are doing. You capture your students’ emotional engagement by giving them more of a stake in the process of learning.

For example:

The Mind’ s Eye

Regularly start a session using the mind’s eye technique. Ask students to relax and sit quietly with their eyes closed. Talk quietly about whatever it is and ask the students to picture it in their mind’s eye. It can become a very powerful habit.

4: Handling uncertainty…Challenge

You have realised from your own life that what is engaging tends to be what is challenging. Since you see education as a preparation for a learning life, you help students to learn how to handle increasing degrees of complexity and uncertainty.

For example:

If / Then Targets

PImage result for if then iconut ‘If-then’ planning into action in your classroom to make goal setting more effective.

If we want students to change their behaviour we need to help them to think much more closely about the ‘hows’ and the ‘whats’. Motivation research proposes an effective solution called ‘if-then’ or ‘when-then’ planning

‘Ifs’ are the situations you want to remind yourself about. They are the triggers that stimulate the ‘Thens’. 

‘Thens’ are what you will do about something, the action you will take whenever the ‘If’ happens.

5: Relationships…Working together

Learning is both a sociable and a solitary activity, and you offer your students opportunities to experience both. You develop interdependent learners who know how to handle themselves in collaborative groups and able to move around in the social space of learning to best effect.

For example:

Explore the emotions of others

Use images or paintings or videos that shows a mix of emotions. Encourage students to speculate about how the individuals might be  feeling/thinking.

The painting is called ‘An experiment with a bird in an air pump’ – look closely at the picture and explain the emotions in the light of this title.

6: Reflection and responsibility…Taking charge

You understand that students have to learn how to manage and organise their own learning and that the way to do this is by giving them increasingly demanding opportunities to do so.   You orchestrate students taking charge of their learning by expecting them to plan what they do, distil meaning from it, and revise it accordingly.

For example:

Use learning mats

at the start of this process to prompt the use of and reflection on imagining.

A checklist for lesson planning based on these six principles.

Does the lesson plan:

  • Make it clear to students which learning behaviours are being activated?
  • Match and blend the learning behaviour with content?
  • Include a tactic to captivate students’ attention?
  • Have sufficiently challenging learning activities to sustain interest for all?
  • Offer choice on how students could interact on these tasks?
  • Embed aspects of planning, reflecting and revising for content and process?

What do you think?

  • Which of these six principles are a regular feature of your planning?
  • What do you make of principle 2? Is it the most tricky of the six? The following section B is mostly about this aspect of planning.
  • Look at the checklist in the green box above this one: Do your lesson plans capture these six aspects of an effective learning experience?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • Which of the six principles might need to be given greater prominence in your planning.

 

 

 

B.   Big questions to ask about lesson design.

What we teach and how we teach it (the enacted curriculum) are intertwined and offer teachers a lot of freedom. It is here that you can start applying a learning power filter and deploy a unique combination of content and learning tasks.

Open Me

Prelude

In conventional lessons where the teacher remains the focus of attention and the initiator of all activity, and where the epistemic dimension (the conditions for acquiring knowledge) is not acknowledged, students gain habits of compliance and dependence, rather than curiosity and self-reliance.

In developing learning power, teachers are making conscious choices about which habits to introduce and stretch and how best to couple these with content so that lessons become more interesting and challenging. Through such overt coupling of content and specific types of process, students come to know, understand and take control of their learning behaviours – they knowingly use and develop the whole range of learning behaviours.

All lessons function on two levels, they have twin intentions. On the one hand there is content to be acquired, and on the other there are learning behaviours to be exercised in pursuit of this content. The factor that differentiates a standard lesson that effectively ‘delivers the content’ from a learning powered lesson is that the teacher has to think, in advance, about:

  • the learning behaviours that are necessary for successful content acquisition;
  • the design of activities /tasks that will stimulate these behaviours;
  • how learners could reflect on and evaluate their use of these behaviours.

In designing such lessons you have to dare to think differently and flip round your usual lesson design thinking.

  A turn-around in lesson design

Think in two dimensions at once – the content dimension and the learning behaviour dimension. It means turning your thinking around – from teaching to learning.

Or put another way

Think to yourself;

  • what content?
  • using which learning behaviour(s)?
  • via an activity to stretch both?

 

Lesson design questions… one by one

Here the general rules of lesson design have been related to the learning behaviour…imagining.

Stage 1. What content do students need to learn?

What content has to be learned? …..Think outcomes.

  • Use standard lesson planning tools:
    • What are students going to be able to do/learn?…think objectives
    • How will they know if they been successful?… think success criteria
  • While keeping an obvious eye on
    • What do they already know?….think previous learning.

 

Stage 2. How will they best learn it?

Using which learning behaviours?

This is the new bit 

Not the usual second step but nonetheless a vital second step where the aim is to weave content acquisition with learning behaviours. The content is the vehicle for exercising the learning behaviours and the learning behaviours accelerate the content acquisition.

Using which learning behaviours?…Think types of learning behaviours

  • Which learning behaviour(s) will help these students get closer to understanding this content?…think learning behaviour charts.
  • Which aspect of, say, imagining, lends itself to achieving these outcomes?…think progression columns.
  • How skilled are these students in using this learning behaviour …think progression phases/rows

Say something like this to yourself .…My students need to achieve xxx. At this stage we could get closer to this content by using imagining. Most of my students are able to use xxx phase (e.g. respond/blue) imagining approaches confidently.

Stage 3. What type of task/activity will stretch the learning?

Which type of task…Think types of task. 

Pick up your thinking from stage 2; 

My students need to achieve xxx. At this stage we could get closer to this content by using imagining. Most of my students would be able to use xxx phase (e.g. blue/responds phase) imagining approaches confidently.

And now think about the sort of task/activity you might develop/design so as to:

  • orchestrate a problem-solving activity to enable students’ understanding of xyz content without telling them;
  • intrigue them with something that is open to several interpretations;
  • stimulate their curiosity;
  • grab their attention…visually and aurally;
  • allow them to stay stuck before I ask them how they are thinking;
  • offer as a nudge to get them thinking differently that doesn’t give the answer away;
  • leave it as a problem hanging in the air to which we will return later;
  • make links between the challenge, and what and how we are learning in this lesson.

The challenge isn’t about the inherent complexity of the subject matter but about how the content is orchestrated to encourage students to use their learning habits to resource their solution.

Think…what/how much information/content do I need to give/reveal? At what point? In what form? To what end?

Say something like this to yourself .

  • my students need to achieve xxx.
  • at this point we could get closer to this content by using imagining.
  • most of my students are able to use xxx phase (e.g. respond/blue phase) imagining approaches confidently.
  • What type of task would stretch their imagining but assist them with the content…without me just telling them!

 

To summarise…the heart of the lesson


It’s the question ‘using which learning behaviours?’ that causes you to think differently about the lesson planning.

  • You ask – as always – what are the anticipated objectives/intentions?
  • The verbs in your resulting objectives will give you clues about the types of task/methodology that will get students there and the sorts of learning behaviours your students will need to contribute to this learning endeavour.

You are designing the task in a way that requires students to contribute their learning ‘powers’ / behaviours. The tasks you design will hook into their learning ‘powers’ and help them to improve them.

Say something like this to yourself:

I am going to think content, learning behaviour and task together:

  • Imagining will help students to better access the content;
  • The aspect of imagining (column) and phase (row) that would fit best is (for example) ‘Pulls ideas together and turns ‘what is’ into ‘what could be’.
  • The type of task/activity that would best stretch both content and learning behaviour, intrigue, challenge, bring people together and give responsibility to students is………
  • Think….what information do I need to reveal/give, in what form, at what point, and what do I want students to do with it?

What do you think?

  • What strikes you about this way of planning with learning behaviours in mind?
  • Where are the potential stumbling blocks?
  • How will you decide which learning behaviour(s) you are going to foreground in your objectives?

Consider a lesson you are about to teach…Little_r

  • What is the content?
  • Which learning behaviour(s), if missing, would make accessing the content very difficult / impossible?
  • How could you blend reference to this learning behaviour(s) into the learning objectives?
  • Can you design a task that will help students to access the content and exercise the key learning behaviour(s) you have identified?

 

 

C. Lesson planning in action – an exemplar, imagining focused, task.

How do we design tasks that stretch Imagining and assist students to approach the content more productively? We cover this in three ways:

  • 1 shows the phases of a lesson where imagining is the driving behaviour;
  • 2 considers a simple lesson plan template that can be used for any lesson and distils the ‘Walker’ lesson into this format;
  • 3 invites you to extend your thinking into other aspects of the curriculum.

 

Open Me

1) The phases of a lesson where imagining is the driving behaviour.

Engaging all the senses to trigger the imagination

 

Episode 1 – What do you notice?:

What is going on here?

Say ‘I want you to be nosy – notice anything about the picture, and when you have done that, share what you have noticed with your partner’

What have you done?

  • Encouraged idea of nosiness, inquisitiveness, curiosity . . .
  • Given a very precise task – notice something, and tell your partner.
  • Used word notice rather than see – why?
  • Started with a low challenge task
  • Used the word ‘when’ – it presupposes success

Does anyone want to say what they think is happening here?
In each case, ask the respondent to look again at the picture to identify the clues that led them to that conclusion. Use ‘what makes you say that’ or ‘because’ to deepen thinking.
Conversely, seek alternative explanations. Ask ‘what else could that be?’ Use the ‘maybe hand’ as you go, raise fingers as you illicit alternative explanations until you have a handful of possibilities.

[You will return to the ‘what do you think is happening’ in Episode 5]

Episode 2 – Turn up the colours:

What is going on here?

Ask students to study the picture in silence for 20 secs. This time, invite them to see the picture in colour – ‘turn up the colours in your head and tell me what you notice’.
Ask who can see colours (some can, some can’t!).

Ask them what they can see in colour.

Respond to answers by probing for more detail to deepen thinking – is it a dark blue? How would you describe it?

[At this stage, the responses generally focus on the colour of the tunic / braiding and the colour of the light coming from the lamp. Once this has been explored, widen it to include the colour of the cobble stones, of the moon, of the rats, of the bottle . . . . ]

 

Episode 3 – Turn up the sounds:

What is going on here?

Again 20 secs silence before responding.

Now turn up the sounds coming out of the picture – and when you have heard them, tell me what you hear.

Probe detail – how long is the sound? Broken or continuous? Volume? Pitch? What can you compare it to?

(ie “I can hear his footsteps” – probe with ‘Is he moving quickly?’, ‘Hard or soft soles on his shoes?’,

or “I can hear the wind blowing / the lamp chain creaking in the wind” – probe with ‘Is it howling?’, ‘Is it blowing towards us or away from us?’,

or ” I can hear people talking” (this is usually from a pub or from behind the Walker in the square at the back of the image – probe with ‘Can you hear what they are saying?’, ‘How many people are talking?’.)

[Try, if possible, to start with those who could not see colour, but could hear sounds].

Experience tells us that this is the most imaginative and creative phase of this lesson. Usually most students can hear sounds, even the ones who could not see colours. Be prepared to spend time on this Episode, and ready yourself with a range of probing questions so that you are not flying blind all of the time.

Episode 4 – Jump into the picture:

What is going on here?

Look at the image again. Now I am going to count to 3. On the count of 3 I want you to jump into the picture and stand somewhere in the picture.

Ok 1,2,3 Go !

As they are looking in silence, quietly nudge their thinking – what can they see and hear, how do they feel?

Share ideas in whole group. Probe with:

  • Where did you stand? Why there?
  • What can you smell?
  • How do you feel?
  • If the opportunity presents itself, try to cross-reference the senses: If someone says it is cold, ask what is the shape of cold; or the taste of cold, or the sound etc.

 

Episode 5 – What do you think is going on here?

What is going on here?

This is where you get one or two students to tell their narrative of what they think is happening.

Give them time to distil their thoughts and create their individual ‘story’. Then move to sharing with a partner.

Finally, ask who has heard a really interesting story (ie the partner recommends someone to share their story with the whole class).

Have questions to hand to sharpen their explanations:

  • Is he a goodie or a baddie ?
  • Is he walking towards something, or away from something.
  • What has he got in his left hand ?
  • Why the look over the shoulder ?
  • What’s on the paper on the wall of the building to the left ?

Download presentation as a ppt

2) Using a lesson plan template to distil this lesson.

Given that there are hundreds of lesson plan formats we will use a few different types of planning tools over the course of these units. This one is a simple streamlined useable tool that includes:

  • What you do (teacher action);
  • What students do (student action);
  • What the learning behaviours being called upon are (learning behaviours);
  • What you say (learning talk) to nudge the learning behaviour along.

The format is divided into episodes to show the change of purpose, action and use of learning behaviour across the course of the lesson.

Download a blank lesson plan as a MS Word document:

Lesson-Planning-Grid-Imagining-blank

If we now populate the template with the episodes explored in section 2 above, we get the completed lesson plan. . .

Lesson-Planning-Grid Imagining

 

What do you think?

  • Does planning for four aspects – teacher action, student action, learning behaviours, teacher talk – seem useful?
  • How does sequencing the lesson as ‘episodes’ help or hinder planning?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • The extent to which your existing planning template enables you to think about lessons in this way.
  • What you would like / need to add to it.

 

3) Extend your thinking about the Engaging all the Senses routine.

How might you use the technique ?

  • As a starter for creative writing;
  • To stimulate interest as a prelude to reading a book  – start with a B&W copy of the dust jacket and repeat the activity in section 1;
  • To build empathy;
  • To scaffold the use of all of the senses;
  • To trigger the imagination.

What do you think?

  • Where / when / why might you use the Engaging all the Senses routine?
  • What will you do with the speculations and questions that are generated.
  • How will these questions inform your planning?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • Which class you might try this with.
  • When you will try it.

 

Continue Reading

Section 2: Building Imagining-friendly classroom cultures

Teachers as habit formers

As teachers we are in the habit-forming business. What we say, what we display on classroom walls, what we celebrate, praise or dismiss, what we model or how we design learning activities will all influence the ways in which students learn, perform and behave. Classroom cultures have a huge influence on students’ learning as you will remember from Playing the Learning Power Game.

Creating a Imagination-friendly classroom culture

As a result of section 1 of this module . . .

You have learned about Imagining and how it grows. You have met the imagining progression chart (opposite) and considered the skills that your students have already mastered and those that might need some further attention.

This section offers a catalogue of teaching ideas, organised in relation to the phases of development in the progression chart, that you can use to sharpen your students’ imagining skills.

But before you dip into the catalogue, let’s take a moment to consider whether your existing classroom culture is sufficiently imagination-friendly to allow students’ imagining skills to flourish and develop.

 

Is your classroom culture ready for Imagining?

Let’s go back to a diagram you may have met in the latter stages of Phase 1 Playing the Learning Power Game.

It is a reminder of what a imagination-friendly classroom culture looks like in terms of the 4 aspects of classroom culture (Relating, Talking, Constructing, Celebrating).

A imagination-friendly classroom culture

Here is a selection of features that might begin to shape the emotional climate of your classroom to encourage imagining.

The diagram has 4 sections:

  • Top – strategies you could build into the way you teach to stimulate imagining;
  • Right – indications of the sort of language you might use to stimulate imagining;
  • Bottom – ways in which you might celebrate / praise students’ use of imagining;
  • Left – things that you need to enable students to do.

Take time to download the diagram and consider which of these aspects are already a regular feature in your classroom, and which could easily be introduced to make the culture even more imagination-friendly.

Blending these ideas

Ask yourself:

How might you harness some or more of the ideas in the imagination-friendly culture diagram . . .

 

 

 

to ready your classroom for building your students’ imagining skills

 

As you begin to explore the teaching ideas for each phase of development, keep these big 4 ideas in mind. Ask yourself – how might you:

  1. Slow the pace of lessons to ensure there is enough time for students to imagine for themselves;

  2. Enable and encourage talk about imagining to ensure students understand the how and why of imagining;

  3. Design activities that exercise and develop students’ imagining skills, and ensure they reflect on how it is developing;

  4. Display, praise and reward the use and growth of imagining.

 

And if you do embed these 4 big ideas . . .

A quick look back to progression in classroom culture.

You have met this diagram in various formats during Phase 1, Playing the Learning Power Game. It charts progression in the 4 aspects of classroom culture (Relating, Talking, Constructing and Celebrating) from a teacher-focused classroom culture at the bottom to a fully-fledged learning-focused culture at the top.

If you are able to keep these 4 big ideas above in mind and embed them in your classroom culture, you will see that your classroom culture is around the fourth row, well on the way to being learning-friendly.

Now take a look at the Learning Chart sections where you will find plenty of ideas to try.

Continue Reading

Section 1: Imagining and how it develops

1a) What do we mean by Imagining?

Imagining is an important way of thinking but one that seems to be afforded too few opportunities in classrooms. Imagination isn’t just a cute faculty that children use to weave fantasies: it is one of the most effective tools in the learner’s toolbox. Scientists, designers and executives need a powerful imagination just as much as painters and novelists, and it can either be developed, through appropriate experience and encouragement, or left to shrivel up. Good learners are ready and able to look at things in different ways. They like playing with ideas and possibilities and adopting different perspectives (even though they may not have a clear idea of where their imagination is leading them). They use pictures and diagrams to help them think and learn.

There are two kinds of imagination: active and receptive. In active imagination, you deliberately create a scenario to run in your mind’s eye. Sports people use this kind of mental rehearsal and experiments have shown it to be very effective at improving their level of skill.

The second kind of imagination is more receptive, like daydreaming: letting a problem slip to the back of your mind, and then just sliding into a kind of semi-awake reverie, where the mind plays with ideas and images without much control on your part. Successful learners and inventors know how to make good use of this kind of creative intuition. They are interested in inklings and ideas that just bubble up into their minds.

Extract from Building Learning Power. Guy Claxton 2002

1b) What does being a good Imaginer involve?

A well formed Imagining habit involves being ready, willing, and able to:

  • Use the mind as a theatre in which to play out ideas and possible actions experimentally.
  • Use a rich variety of visual, aural and sensory experiences to trigger creative and lateral thinking.
  • Explore possibilities speculatively, saying ‘What might …’, ‘What could …’ and ‘What if …?’ rather than being constrained by what is.
  • Retain a childlike playfulness when confronted with challenges and difficulties.
  • Be aware of intended outcomes whilst adopting a flexible approach to realising goals.
  • Rehearse actions in the mind before performing them in reality.

So, at a less abstract level, students need to have a wide range of experiences on which to base their imaginations; to have the bravery to take imaginative risks; to have the ability to visualise what they will do in advance of taking action; to be happy to allow their minds to explore intuitions and possible lines of enquiry; and to create innovative creative outcomes. When looked at from these diverse angles growing imagination moves well beyond encouraging a student to ‘be creative’.

Our progression grid for Imagining has 6 components:

Imagining Grid final - Imagining grids - Colour

Download grid as a pdf

3. Unpicking the columns; what contributes to a readiness to Imagine?

The grid columns are things that might combine to make up the skills and attitudes of an Imaginer.

Overview of the gridImagining Grid final - Imagining grids - Colour

Imagining in all its forms is about using the mind as a theatre in which to play with ideas. It’s about stepping outside the reality of now and thinking about ‘could be’, ‘what if’. Such thinking can be enriched through a range of experiences or it can be left to atrophy. This grid has a number of perhaps surprising features; how the imagination can be nurtured; how the growth of empathy is important in imagination; what outcomes emerge from different frames of mind and how the two types of imagining grow. At the root of it all lies the range of experiences children are afforded. The richer the range of experience, both actual and through stories, art, music etc. the richer the bedrock for the imagination to play with. Imagination has strong connections with Making Links for it relies on linking possibilities, and indeed impossibilities, in new, unusual and absurd ways. The grid attempts to intertwine these important contributors to growing the habit of Imagining.

Logic will get you from A to B. Imagination will take you everywhere.– Albert Einstein

Take a closer look at what each column of the grid is about

Imagining Grid final - Imagining grids - Columns_Page_1Nurturing imagination

How growing experience fuels imagination

Without rich experiences of life and indeed other imaginations we have little raw material to fuel our imagination. This column is about building that experience from day to day living, to purposefully gathering ideas to trigger the imagination. Affording, building and helping children to retrieve such experiences becomes an important role for teachers and parents

Imagining Grid final - Imagining grids - Columns_Page_2Growing empathy

Seeing things from other viewpoints

Empathy enables our mind to detach itself from oneself and see the world from other viewpoints, seeing other realities not as absolutes but just alternatives. Hence growing empathy fuels our imagination as we learn to see things in ways that are different to our own. We might do this from meeting and talking with others but we can also get a feel for such differences through film or television where we are often put into the lives of others.

Imagining Grid final - Imagining grids - Columns_Page_3Self-talk

The voice of self awareness

Self talk is what we say to ourselves as we learn. The statements capture what someone in each phase of the grid would be thinking. Students may use some of these phrases when talking with you, or in writing from time to time, but mostly self-talk goes on inside their heads. We have shown a small flavour of self-talk thoughts that teachers can encourage students to imitate. All such self-talk is important in building a Imagining habit.

Imagining Grid final - Imagining grids - Columns_Page_4Active imagination

Deliberate creation of imaginative scenarios

Here we can see the growth of a conscious use of imagination. It may begin with being based in concrete experiences eg imaginative play in classrooms where children transfer their experiences of life into a child sized setting. But it moves on to pulling ideas together (linking) and asking ‘what if?’ From there we might move to being able to visualise what we want to achieve or make or create. We consciously imagine an end point and even a way of doing it. We are able to imagine ourselves through an experience using all the ways of doing it that we know will work; we rehearse it in our mind before actually doing it. This is very different from simply imagining ourselves ‘winning’, this is living the process that will, hopefully, lead us to ‘winning’. Imagining such a process is almost as good as actually practising it in reality.

Imagining Grid final - Imagining grids - Columns_Page_5Receptive imagination

Generating a state of reverie

This type of imagining is about shifting a problem to the back of your mind and entering an almost dreamlike state to play with ideas. You follow your intuition, follow inklings and hunches and let things just bubble up in your mind. It’s a state of wondering, shifting, sifting, juxtaposing, just to see where it goes.

Imagining Grid final - Imagining grids - Columns_Page_6Imaginative outcomes

Growing the outcomes of imagination.

The last constituent of Imagining has to do with how the growth of our way of imagining leads to different sorts of outcomes. In the early stages, our limited experiences lead to predictable and cautious outcomes. When our imagination allows us to suspend reality and abandon our inhibitions the outcomes are more independent and constructive. Yet later, when our imagination lets us break normal rules and distort reality the outcomes are more original, more playful, more innovative.

What do you think?

  • What have you learned about Imagining from these descriptions?
  • What have you had confirmed?
  • What surprised you?
  • How have your views changed?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • Any ideas for practical classroom experiments that these descriptions have triggered
  • Which column your students are most secure in.

1d) Unpicking the rows; getting better at Imagining.

Of course, the development of Imagining doesn’t grow neatly up each column or evenly across the phases in the grid. The five broad phases of dispositional growth (receives – embodies) are affective ways in which people may be inclined to behave: we call this inclination ‘mindedness’.

Here is our interpretation of how Imagining might grow.

Imagining Grid final - Imagining grids - Colour

Meaning behind the phases

The phases are drawn from Bloom’s taxonomy of the affective domain.

Phase ‘Receives’ (purple) is about doing something because you are told or expected to.
Phase ‘Responds’ (blue) is about gaining interest and doing things more willingly.
Phase ‘Values’ (green) is a key phase since the student now sees the value of behaving in this way. It’s a win for them; to behave like this is in their interest. It’s in this phase that the behaviour becomes more secure.
Phase ‘Organises’ (yellow) is the phase in which the student capitalises on this ‘in their interest’ behaviour and gets themselves organised to use it positively.
Phase ‘Embodies’ (orange), known as ‘characterised’ in the original taxonomy. In this phase, the student has made this behaviour their own. It has become part of their character; they can’t not do it and they have become highly skilled in doing it.
We urge you to see this progression as long term. Some phases will take years for people to work through; some will never be worked through. None of the phases are inevitable. There is a lifetime of development captured here. Nevertheless, the role of a teacher or parent should surely be to encourage and enable this journey.

Lacks: Minded to pretend a little

Imagining Grid final - Imagining grids - Rows_Page_6

In this ‘Lacks’ (grey) phase, students are unaware of the concept of imagining. They may play at being another (known) character but rarely ascribe the label of imagining. Their experience of the world is somewhat limited and this limitation affects the richness of their early imaginative play. They tend to stick to the ‘rules’ of reality.

Receives: Minded to re-play reality.

Imagining Grid final - Imagining grids - Rows_Page_5
In the Receives (purple) phase, students are busy building up their range of experiences of the world and this in large part prescribes how they imagine things to be. Their imaginative state is still often suggested by adults but they are recognising that others can and do have different kinds of feelings and thoughts to themselves. This can be the source of some discomfort.

Responds: Minded to imagine beyond the rules of reality .

Imagining Grid final - Imagining grids - Rows_Page_4
In the Responds (blue) phase, students are broadening their range of experiences not only of and in real life settings but also through stories and myths and art and fairy tales. Such stories allow them to appreciate that at least in stories the rules of reality can be broken or disregarded. In the growth of empathy, they are again stepping out of their more restricted world and into the lives of others through film or the internet. This allows them an insight into the lives of others. So their growing experiences lead to more imitative and responsive imaginative outcomes.

Values: Minded to put their imagination to practical use

Imagining Grid final - Imagining grids - Rows_Page_3
In the Values (green) phase, students know how to use their memories of experiences and stories to achieve their own imaginative writing. They are able to abandon their inhibitions and create other worlds. They can see that in the world of imagination they can ‘get’ things to act differently and this frees them to think more boldly.

Organises: Minded to let their imagination run wild

Imagining Grid final - Imagining grids - Rows_Page_2
In the Organises (yellow) phase, Imagining has become a skilful habit – they are organising themselves to fuel their imagination further. They often collect pictures or songs or poems or artefacts that they may use to trigger their imagination in the future. Their listening habits have shifted to being focused on understanding other viewpoints and all this combines to give them insights into other real and imaginary worlds. This gives them what they need to achieve original outcomes.

Embodies: Minded to use imagination as a default setting to solve problems

Imagining Grid final - Imagining grids - Rows_Page_1
In the Embodies (orange) phase, we are genuinely able to detach from our own views and emotions and appreciate those of others as alternatives, even when we disagree with them. In this phase, we use our imaginations freely to solve problems innovatively. The constraints of our world as we know it, our inhibitions, our conscious criticism (telling ourselves that’s a silly idea) have been dropped as inhibitors and our imagination helps us to solve problems, entertain, provoke further thought.

What do you think?

  • What has struck you about the act of Imagining having read the descriptions above?
  • Which phase do you operate in?
  • What makes you say that?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • What you might do to assist your students, to make headway in their Imagining behaviour.
  • Any practical ideas the text has triggered.

Preparation for the Learning Team meeting

Where are my pupils now?

  • Take a look at the Imagining progression chart in your Learning Diary or
  • Download grid to colour in here
  • Colour in the cells where you think your students are secure.
  • Some will barely be on the chart while others may be quite a way up. Neat straight lines of secure behaviours are rare. But looking at your students in this way should give you an idea of what you need to work on.
  • Draw a red line across the chart to denote where you think most of the school’s students could and should reach by the time they leave.
  • Please take the results of these tasks with you to the Professional Learning Team session shown in Section 4
Continue Reading

Section 4: Team reflection and planning

Session Agenda

  1. Agreeing objectives and agenda (5mins)
  2. Sharing learning enquiries (20mins)
  3. Re-capping the on-line materials (15mins)
  4. Deciding what’s to be done (15mins)
  5. Personal Action Planning (20mins)
  6. Evaluating the meeting process (5mins)

1. Session objectives. What do we want to achieve? ( 5 mins)

  • Feel able to apply the on-line materials in the classroom
  • Decide the strategic cultural issues that everyone needs to apply in their classroom
  • Plan some do-able shifts in classroom practice

2. Sharing learning enquiries

Share

  • the changes in practice you tried
  • the changes in classroom culture you were hoping to achieve
  • how students reacted
  • what you learned
  • what next as a result

Probe

  • what was getting in the way?
  • what seemed difficult?
  • what would make it easier?
  • what made it work particularly well?
  • why it was successful?
  • changes in your behaviour

Impact on pupils

  • Greater willingness to try…
  • Avoidance of…..
  • Improvements in……
  • Increases in…….
  • Little or no changes in…

 

3. Recapping on-line materials. What did we think of the materials? ( 15 mins)

Thoughts about;

  • The Collaboration progression grid
  • Where students are secure
  • Where students could be secure when they leave our school
  • Classroom culture ideas
  • Ideas for activities and routines.

4. Planning what to do. What do we need to do next? ( 10 mins )

Decide

  • Which ideas should we all adopt as whole school strategies?
  • How the progression of Collaboration should be built across the school. ie how the phases of Collaboration might play out against key stages and even year groups.

5. Personal action planning. What am I going to do? ( 20 mins )

Consider

  • how you want your pupils to improve/develop/enhance their approach to Collaborating?
  • what you are going to do to bring this about?
  • how you want to consolidate/develop your classroom culture for collaboration?
  • what you are going to do to bring this about?
  • develop an enquiry question.

Think of it like this…

If I do  XXXX will it improve/develop/enhance YYYY

This is the crunch question. Your pupils are unlikely to change unless you change!

Capture your learning enquiry as a question

Developing-an-enquiry-question-Colaboration

Developing-an-enquiry-question-Colaboration.pdf

and put a short enquiry plan together

 

Personal Action Plan-Colloboration

Personal-Action-Plan-Colloboration.pdf

Things you might want to look out for that result from your classroom experiment.

Purple (Show me. Tell me)

  • improvements in taking turns and listening to other people
  • improvement in offering their own ideas
  • greater inclination to listen to understand
  • beginning to think about how they contributed to a group or team effort.

Blue (I’ll try)

  • more trusting and prepared to contribute
  • increased empathy for others
  • willingness to experiment with different roles in a group
  • shows a willingness to accept feedback on how the team has functioned

Green (I see why)

  • increasingly open to feedback from other group members
  • has a real sense of being in and working as a team
  • has a tendency to collect evidence on how the team functioned, with an eye on improvement

Yellow (I’ll make sure I do)

  • is increasingly able to manage conflict in a team
  • has a growing tendency to build consensus in the team
  • always has the team’s health and vitality at heart when suggesting improvements

6. Evaluate team session, How did we do as a team? ( 5 mins )

  • Did we achieve our objectives?
  • Are we comfortable with what we are trying to achieve?
  • Any concerns at this point?
  • Next meeting date and time.
Continue Reading

Section 3: Blending Collaboration with content

So far, you have:

  • Looked at your students through the lens of the Collaborating learning chart
  • Gained a sense of what becoming better at Collaborating looks like
  • Explored a range of ideas and activities that will help to engage students with Collaborating

Now we look closely at how to blend improving students’ collaboration into the content you have to teach.

A. The principles behind any learning powered lesson

B. Big questions to ask about lesson design

C. Lesson planning in action…an exemplar collaboration focused task

Learning habits form through use and practice, but desirable habits survive and flourish better if students are aware of them, realise their value and strive to improve them. The curriculum through its lessons provides the rich and varied occasions for exercising learning habits.

A. The principles behind any learning powered lesson

Think of yourself as a learning power coach, helping your students to help themselves to develop their learning habits. Hence your lessons are much more likely to contain challenges and activities that get your students thinking and learning for themselves. You encourage students to explore challenging questions, problems or assertions and become observers of their own learning. You step back from telling and heavy scaffolding and instead try to mobilise your students’ learning behaviours. You are organising learning to let them take the strain.

Open Me

The SIX principles that lie behind teaching for learning power

1: Visible learning…Surfacing learning

You make it clear to students which learning habits and processes they are using. You try to make every aspect of the learning process as visible as possible through the language you use and through the words and images you display on the walls.

For example: 

misc-teleportation-script-imbuedInvite the students to develop a charter of matching rights and responsibilities or ground rules for collaboration. If everyone has a right to have their voice heard, everyone also has a responsibility to listen attentively to others and wait until they have finished speaking. Display the results prominently and refer to them frequently.

2: Dual focus teaching…blending content and process

You design activities that combine the dual objectives of ‘what’ will be learned and ‘how’ it will be learned. You make sure students know that the content they are learning is a way of giving their minds a useful workout. (The content is the vehicle for learning)

For example: 

Put the ‘how’ before the ‘what’ in constructing objectives or intentions.

Research shows that objectives relating to ‘understanding xxxxx’ or ‘knowing yyyyy’ are less likely to motivate a learner to make the effort than those that start with some indication of the sort of ‘effort’ or way of doing something

For example: We are going to…

  • …work as a team to decide why…….
  • select and use the most appropriate team roles to complete……
  • …use the fairest team decision making process to work your way through ….challenge

3: Emotional engagement…Capturing attention

Your lessons are designed to intrigue your students. Students don’t put in the effort unless their energy and attention are captured by what they are doing. You capture your students’ emotional engagement by giving them more of a stake in the process of learning.

For example:

Offer students strategies so that they are able to manage their stake in the process

Tasc Planning Wheel

Introduce the TASC wheel to help teams/students to structure their response to a given task – start from 1 o’clock and work clockwise round the wheel. Additionally use it as a means of discussing who will be doing what at each point in the process, thereby opening up a conversation about roles and responsibilities.

4: Handling uncertainty…Challenge

You have realised from your own life that what is engaging tends to be what is challenging. Since you see education as a preparation for a learning life, you help students to learn how to handle increasing degrees of complexity and uncertainty.

For example:

Use supportive/shared processes to build shared responsibility to deal with challenge.

pizza-4-stagioni-archite-01

Provide each team member with a piece of ‘pizza’, plus one spare. Ask students to write their own ideas or responses or solutions or questions or answers etc on their own piece. Once complete, the pizza is assembled and the team together distil their thinking and complete the final piece of the pizza. Display either  each team’s pizza, or of the distilled pieces from all teams to form a composite view.

Pizza the Action is a Kagan Cooperative Learning structure.

5: Relationships…Working together

Learning is both a sociable and a solitary activity, and you offer your students opportunities to experience both. You develop interdependent learners who know how to handle themselves in collaborative groups and able to move around in the social space of learning to best effect.

For example:

Introduce activities that build ‘working together’ behaviours

Prepare the way for students to build on the ideas of others when working in a group by making ‘ABC’ a routine that you use during whole-class teaching. Once a student has answered a question, ask another student to Add to it, to Build on it, to Challenge it, to Defend it, to Elaborate on it, or to Find a Flaw in it.  As easy as ABC ! This improves students’ listening skills at the same time!

6: Reflection and responsibility…Taking charge

You understand that students have to learn how to manage and organise their own learning and that the way to do this is by giving them increasingly demanding opportunities to do so. You orchestrate students taking charge of their learning by expecting them to plan what they do, distil meaning from it, and revise it accordingly.

For example:

Prompt students to reflect on how they are/have been collaborating.

At the start of this process introduce learning mats to prompt the use of and reflection on collaborating.

A checklist for lesson planning based on these six principles.

Does the lesson plan:

  • Make it clear to students which learning behaviours are being activated?
  • Match and blend the learning behaviour with content?
  • Include a tactic to captivate students’ attention?
  • Have sufficiently challenging learning activities to sustain interest for all?
  • Offer choice on how students could interact on these tasks?
  • Embed aspects of planning, reflecting and revising for content and process?

What do you think?

  • Which of these six principles are a regular feature of your planning?
  • What do you make of principle 2? Is it the most tricky of the six? The following section B is mostly about this aspect of planning.
  • Look at the checklist in the green box above this one: Do your lesson plans capture these six aspects of an effective learning experience?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • Which of the six principles might need to be given greater prominence in your planning.

 

 

B.   Big questions to ask about lesson design.

Skim read or leave this section if you have met it in other units because… the section applies to any learning behaviour. i.e. not specific to Collaborating.

What we teach and how we teach it (the enacted curriculum) are intertwined and offer teachers a lot of freedom. It is here that you can start applying a learning power filter and deploy a unique combination of content and learning tasks.

Open Me

Prelude

In conventional lessons where the teacher remains the focus of attention and the initiator of all activity, and where the epistemic dimension (the conditions for acquiring knowledge) is not acknowledged, students gain habits of compliance and dependence, rather than curiosity and self-reliance.

In developing learning power, teachers are making conscious choices about which habits to introduce and stretch and how best to couple these with content so that lessons become more interesting and challenging. Through such overt coupling of content and specific types of process, students come to know, understand and take control of their learning behaviours – they knowingly use and develop the whole range of learning behaviours.

All lessons function on two levels, they have twin intentions. On the one hand there is content to be acquired, and on the other there are learning behaviours to be exercised in pursuit of this content. The factor that differentiates a standard lesson that effectively ‘delivers the content’ from a learning powered lesson is that the teacher has to think, in advance, about:

  • the learning behaviours that are necessary for successful content acquisition;
  • the design of activities /tasks that will stimulate these behaviours;
  • how learners could reflect on and evaluate their use of these behaviours.

In designing such lessons you have to dare to think differently and flip round your usual lesson design thinking.

  A turn-around in lesson design

Think in two dimensions at once – the content dimension and the learning behaviour dimension. It means turning your thinking around – from teaching to learning.

Or put another way

Think to yourself;

  • what content?
  • using which learning behaviour(s)?
  • via an activity to stretch both?

 

Lesson design questions… one by one

Here the general rules of lesson design have been related to the learning behaviour…collaborating.

Stage 1. What content do students need to learn?

What content has to be learned? …..Think outcomes.

  • Use standard lesson planning tools:
    • What are students going to be able to do/learn?…think objectives
    • How will they know if they been successful?… think success criteria
  • While keeping an obvious eye on
    • What do they already know?….think previous learning.

 

Stage 2. How will they best learn it?

Using which learning behaviours?

This is the new bit 

Not the usual second step but nonetheless a vital second step where the aim is to weave content acquisition with learning behaviours. The content is the vehicle for exercising the learning behaviours and the learning behaviours accelerate the content acquisition.

Using which learning behaviours?…Think types of learning behaviours

  • Which learning behaviour(s) will help these students get closer to understanding this content?…think learning behaviour charts.
  • Which aspect of, say, collaborating, lends itself to achieving these outcomes?…think progression columns.
  • How skilled are these students in using this learning behaviour …think progression phases/rows

Say something like this to yourself .…My students need to achieve xxx. At this stage we could get closer to this content by using collaboration. Most of my students are able to use xxx phase (e.g. respond/blue) collaborating approaches confidently.

Stage 3. What type of task/activity will stretch the learning?

Which type of task…Think types of task. 

Pick up your thinking from stage 2; 

My students need to achieve xxx. At this stage we could get closer to this content by using collaborating. Most of my students would be able to use xxx phase (e.g. blue/responds phase) collaborating approaches confidently.

And now think about the sort of task/activity you might develop/design so as to:

  • orchestrate a problem-solving activity to enable students’ understanding of xyz content without telling them;
  • intrigue them with something that is open to several interpretations;
  • stimulate their curiosity;
  • grab their attention…visually and aurally;
  • allow them to stay stuck before I ask them how they are thinking;
  • offer as a nudge to get them thinking differently that doesn’t give the answer away;
  • leave it as a problem hanging in the air to which we will return later;
  • make links between the challenge, and what and how we are learning in this lesson.

The challenge isn’t about the inherent complexity of the subject matter but about how the content is orchestrated to encourage students to use their learning habits to resource their solution.

Think…what/how much information/content do I need to give/reveal? At what point? In what form? To what end?

Say something like this to yourself .

  • my students need to achieve xxx.
  • at this point we could get closer to this content by using collaborating.
  • most of my students are able to use xxx phase (e.g. respond/blue phase) collaborating approaches confidently.
  • What type of task would stretch their collaboration but assist them with the content…without me just telling them!

 

 

To summarise…the heart of the lesson


It’s the question ‘using which learning behaviours?’ that causes you to think differently about the lesson planning.

  • You ask – as always – what are the anticipated objectives/intentions?
  • The verbs in your resulting objectives will give you clues about the types of task/methodology that will get students there and the sorts of learning behaviours your students will need to contribute to this learning endeavour.

You are designing the task in a way that requires students to contribute their learning ‘powers’ / behaviours. The tasks you design will hook into their learning ‘powers’ and help them to improve them.

Say something like this to yourself:

I am going to think content, learning behaviour and task together:

  • Collaboration will help students to better access the content;
  • The aspect of collaborating (column) and phase (row) that would fit best is (for example) building on and improving  the ideas
  • The type of task/activity that would best stretch both content and learning behaviour, intrigue, challenge, bring people together and give responsibility to students is………
  • Think….what information do I need to reveal/give, in what form, at what point, and what do I want students to do with it?

What do you think?

  • What strikes you about this way of planning with learning behaviours in mind?
  • Where are the potential stumbling blocks?
  • How will you decide which learning behaviour(s) you are going to foreground in your objectives?

Consider a lesson you are about to teach…Little_r

  • What is the content?
  • Which learning behaviour(s), if missing, would make accessing the content very difficult / impossible?
  • How could you blend reference to this learning behaviour(s) into the learning objectives?
  • Can you design a task that will help students to access the content and exercise the key learning behaviour(s) you have identified?

 

 

C. Lesson planning in action – an exemplar, collaborating focused, task.

How do we design tasks that stretch Collaboration and assist students to approach the content more productively? We cover this in four ways:

  • 1  Collaborative group-work: principles and checklists
  • 2  Collaboration focused task 
  • 3 The lesson plan shown as a simple grid 
  • 4 Extend your thinking about this type of task 

 

Open Me

 

1. Collaborative group-work: principles and checklists

Take a look at these words from an Ofsted report from a visit to an outstanding school:

‘Though students have many opportunities to work collaboratively they do not always do so effectively or understand the different roles they might play within a group. The school should ensure that students understand how to work effectively in a group and that they all have the opportunity to take on different roles.’

Here and elsewhere, there is a need to deepen students’ social learning habits to ensure that they have a robust understanding of what it means to truly collaborate and are regularly putting these habits into practice.

In many classrooms, students are required to work together – though not as frequently as one might suppose – but they are rarely set challenges that require high levels of collaboration nor are they helped to disaggregate the attributes and habits of effective collaborators.

Genuine collaboration requires:

  • Appraisal of the task in hand
  • Agreement as to the imagined outcome or goals
  • Systematic thinking: setting deadlines and check-points
  • Understanding of the roles and responsibilities that need to be discharged
  • Open-mindedness and creativity
  • Appropriate and distributed leadership
  • Evaluation of the time and resources needed to accomplish the task

Your job as a teacher is to ensure that these Seven principles of effective collaboration are understood and adopted by all students. This isn’t done by telling them what they are but by drawing them out in agreement with the students themselves.

Thereafter you will need to ensure that collaborative tasks lend itself to collaborative group-work. That is to say they:

  • Sustain long-term student engagement
  • Are open-ended and challenging
  • Depend on the use of a variety of roles and responsibilities
  • Involve all partners
  • Lead to urgent and purposeful procedures
  • Require choice and decision-making
  • Lead to prioritised action and successful outcomes

A useful checklist to set against any collaborative tasks you design.

2.  Collaboration focused task.

Here we work through a lesson that aims to combine:

  • surviving in a desert (content)
  • collaboration, teamwork (in particular learning behaviours in the xxx phase)
  • a ranking order type task.

See if you can spot the collaboration principles that have been embedded.

The lesson has 7 episodes as follows:

Episode 1 Noticing detail and a reminder to use teamwork ground rules

Episode 2. Sharing and building ideas

Episode 3. Agreeing a goal and dealing with controversy

Episode 4. Making good decisions in planning and foreseeing obstacles

Episode 5. Assessing individual contributions to the team effort

Episode 6. Assessing team performance

Episode 7. Reviewing team performance in view of knowledge of the experts’ answer

All these aspects of teamwork are taken from the Collaboration chart

 

In this lesson the teacher is orchestrating the activity – splitting it up into episodes and guiding it along in order to highlight/stretch/provoke particular aspects of collaboration.

But you could run this activity without any structuring, i.e. just set the task, observe the action and let groups know when time is up.

Objectives and explanation of how the format works

N.B.  We are activating general teamwork conventions here. These are activated through teacher talk

Screen Shot 2015-06-17 at 16.33.24 smEpisode 1 – Setting up the challenge

What’s happening here?

1.Time 7 minutes

2. Screen image. The hook An intriguing challenge to get students engaged. You may want briefly to summarise the task ahead.

3. / 4. Teacher Action and Student Action This first episode is designed to encourage groups to become familiar with the challenge, to begin to think about how they will tackle it, and so resist the temptation to rush into action.

Resources 1 and 2: The learning Challenge – Stranded (R1) and Observation sheet (R2), 1 per group

5) Learning behaviours. In this episode students will be using their noticing skills to get under the skin of the challenge and their collaboration skills to identify what the task is about (collaboration purple) and to begin to prioritise action (collaboration green).

6) Teacher talk:- Here we suggest the sort of teacher talk that is designed to nudge the learning behaviours in the right direction, and supportive of the sort of discussion you are trying to orchestrate. This talk will of course be tailored to the age and existing learning behaviours of your group. The examples given in the teacher talk box nudge students to observe the conventions of group work and to be attentive to detail.

Screen Shot 2015-06-17 at 16.33.24 smEpisode 2 – Possible survival strategies

What’s happening here?

1) Time 8 mins

2) Screen image – Posing key questions

3/4 Teacher and Student Action. Purpose: To steer students to realise that they cannot begin to rank the relative importance of the items until they have decided together on their strategy for survival – [Walking to the ranch would make the compass and map important, whereas staying put and awaiting rescue would not]. The group activity suggests groups generate at least three possible survival strategies. (Possible strategies could be: go to ranch; stay put; retrace minibus tracks; walk in general direction of hotel; walk to try to find a road . . . . )

(A teaching point – students will usually gravitate to the ‘go to the ranch’ strategy, in the expectation of finding people, shelter and water. The unspoken assumption is that it is a working ranch with people at it who can help. To help them to avoid this course of action (which is wrong anyway) you might need to nudge their thinking with comments like ‘what do you actually know about the ranch?’ and ‘what can you be certain about?’)

5) Learning behaviours: -In this episode students will be using their imagination based on information given to generate possible courses of action. In collaboration terms, the team need to  share and offer their own views (collaboration purple) and make relevant comments (collaboration blue)

6) Teacher talk:- this needs to be tailored to the age and existing level of questioning behaviours of your group. The examples given in the teacher talk box nudge towards careful consideration of various alternatives.

Screen Shot 2015-06-17 at 16.33.24 sm

Episode 3 – What should we do?

What’s happening here

1) Time 5 mins

2) Screen image – Time for groups to decide on their strategy

3/4) Teacher and Student Action. Purpose – to require groups to agree on their preferred/agreed survival strategy.

5) Learning behaviours: – In episode 3 students are required to consider the strategies they thought of in episode 2, and to agree which one they intend to adopt. In collaboration terms, they are seeking agreement in setting goals and resolving potential differences of opinion, dealing with possible controversy (collaboration blue and green).

6) Teacher talk:- intervene in groups as and when necessary in order to prompt further consideration and/or to agree a way forward, or ways to resolve conflict.

Screen Shot 2015-06-17 at 16.33.24 sm

Episode 4 – What do we need [most]?

What’s happening here?

1) Time 12 mins – Ensure groups are aware of the time limits in this episode.

2) Screen image – Here groups to identify precisely how they are going to use the items to ensure survival

3/4) Teacher and Student Action. Purpose – to enable groups to plan how they will use the items to give themselves the best chance of survival.

5) Learning behaviours: – In episode 4 groups are required to make good decisions to reach their goal (collaboration yellow) by making links to prior knowledge/experience and by capitalising on the potential uses of the items taken from the bus.

6) Teacher talk:- intervene in groups as and when necessary in order to prompt them to exploit the potential uses of the items.

Watch for how they pull together as a group; how they encourage others to contribute, how they contribute to making good decisions.

Screen Shot 2015-06-17 at 16.33.24 sm

Episode 5 – How did I do?

What’s happening here?

1) Time 3 mins

2) Screen image – Pose the question about individual contributions to the group.

3/4) Teacher and Student Action. The main activity is now finished. Purpose now is to enable individuals to reflect on their personal contribution to, and feelings about, the process. Allow students to reflect individually. Could be done as a pair exercise if students trust each other. Try to get a sense of how honest students are being regarding their contributions

Resource 3 – Post Decision questionnaire, 1 per student 

5) Learning behaviours: – In episode 5 individuals are required to think about how they have contributed (collaboration purple) to the activity, their feelings about the extent to which a good decision was made and the extent to which their views were respected (collaboration green) .

6) Teacher talk:- intervene only if necessary

Screen Shot 2015-06-17 at 16.33.24 sm

Episode 6 – How well did we do as a team?

 

What’s happening here?

1.Time 6 mins

2. Screen image – Time now for observers to feedback on group/individual behaviours and generate evaluative discussion.

3/4. Teacher and Student Action. Purpose – to help groups practise reflecting on their team-working during the activity.

Resource Observing a Learning challenge – stranded

5. Learning behaviours: – In episode 6 the observer/groups will offer/accept feedback on their own and group performance (collaboration blue) and evaluate team effort (collaboration yellow).

6. Teacher talk:- intervene in groups only in order to prompt groups to hear the observer’s feedback with a view to using it to improve.

Screen Shot 2015-06-17 at 16.33.24 sm

Episode 7 – What the experts say

Resource – The Learning Challenge: Answer sheet.

Let teams see the experts’ answer and estimate how close they come to this. Also encourage teams to think about what they might have done differently to achieve a closer answer.

Here is the PPt of the lesson plan format shown above. This animated version may help understanding.

What do you think?

  • Have you thought of a lesson as a blend of teacher actions, student actions, learning behaviours, and teacher talk before?
  • How could you use this type of activity to advantage in your own classroom?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • Your initial reactions to the Stranded activity.

3 The lesson plan shown as a simple grid.

Here you will find the Stranded lesson translated into our simple lesson plan format.

The format is divided into episodes to show the change of purpose, action and use of learning behaviour across the course of the lesson:

  • What you do (teacher action);
  • What students do (student action);
  • The learning behaviours being called upon to be activated (from progression charts);
  • What you say (learning talk) to nudge the learning behaviour along.

 

Download a blank lesson plan as a MS Word document: Lesson-Planning-Grid 

You can download the completed format here.

What do you think?

  • Does planning for four aspects – teacher action, student action, learning behaviours, teacher talk – seem useful?
  • How does sequencing the lesson as ‘episodes’ help or hinder planning?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • The extent to which your existing planning template enables you to think about lessons in this way.
  • What you would like / need to add to it.

 

4 Extend your thinking about using this type of task

a) Other ways to organise this type of lesson

Allow greater freedom

The version of Stranded we have unpacked is ‘hand-held’, in other words you as the teacher did a lot of the work nudging the action along. But it is possible to run this sort of activity such that you simply set it up, let it run and concentrate on what happened in a big debrief at the end, It goes something like:

  • 1  Set up a scenario and a goal (change the setting to suit i.e. not a desert)
  • 2 Remove  yourself from the activity and let the group get on with it
  • 3 Leave out any help or nudges that might steer students to the right/appropriate answer
  • 4 Dispense with the ranking task and ask students to decide on/agree only the most essential/important object/ activity to ensure safety/success
  • 5 Allow 30 mins for this decision making process
  • 6 Reveal the answer before reflecting on the process
  • 7 Allow 15 minutes for reflecting on the group process. Leave out the individual reflections

Focus the activity on questioning

  1. Set up a scenario and goal to select the most essential object to bring about the best solution
  2. Leave out any nudging and dispense with the ranking activity
  3. Add in rules such as only able to use open questions in making the decision or limited to 10 or 20 questions in reaching a decision
  4. Appoint an observer with a checklist of types of questions
  5. Allow 20 minutes for the decision making process
  6. Orchestrate 15 minutes  reflection on the use of questions using comments and observations from the observer’s analysis.

b) Where else in the curriculum might this sort of task fit

Small groups could be asked to:

  • design a science experiment and choose from a range of possible resources;
  • undertake a design and make task in D&T;
  • work together to create a performance in the expressive arts.

What do you think?

  • Where / when / why might you use Stranded or similar technique?
  • Where else in the curriculum would you want to give practice in group decision making?
  • How will you ensure that this type of  group work is frequently an integral part of  lessons, and not just a ‘catchy’ activity before the ‘serious’ work begins?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • Which class/group/subject you might try this activity with.
  • When you will try it?

Continue Reading

Section 2: Building Collaboration-friendly classroom cultures

Teachers as habit formers

As teachers we are in the habit-forming business. What we say, what we display on classroom walls, what we celebrate, praise or dismiss, what we model or how we design learning activities will all influence the ways in which students learn, perform and behave. Classroom cultures have a huge influence on students’ learning as you will remember from Playing the Learning Power Game.

Creating a Collaboration-friendly classroom culture

As a result of section 1 of this module . . .

You have learned about Collaboration and how it grows. You have met the collaboration progression chart (opposite) and considered the skills that your students have already mastered and those that might need some further attention.

This section offers a catalogue of teaching ideas, organised in relation to the phases of development in the progression chart, that you can use to sharpen your students’ collaboration skills.

But before you dip into the catalogue, let’s take a moment to consider whether your existing classroom culture is sufficiently collaboration-friendly to allow students’ collaboration skills to flourish and develop.

 

Is your classroom culture ready for Collaboration?

Let’s go back to a diagram you may have met in the latter stages of Phase 1 Playing the Learning Power Game.

It is a reminder of what a collaboration-friendly classroom culture looks like in terms of the 4 aspects of classroom culture (Relating, Talking, Constructing, Celebrating).

A collaboration-friendly classroom culture

Here is a selection of features that might begin to shape the emotional climate of your classroom to encourage collaboration.

The diagram has 4 sections:

  • Top – strategies you could build into the way you teach to stimulate collaboration;
  • Right – indications of the sort of language you might use to stimulate collaboration;
  • Bottom – ways in which you might celebrate / praise students’ use of collaboration;
  • Left – things that you need to enable students to do.

Take time to download the diagram and consider which of these aspects are already a regular feature in your classroom, and which could easily be introduced to make the culture even more collaboration-friendly.

Blending these ideas

Ask yourself:

How might you harness some or more of the ideas in the collaboration-friendly culture diagram . . .

 

 

 

to ready your classroom for building your students’ collaboration skills

As you begin to explore the teaching ideas for each phase of development, keep these big 4 ideas in mind. Ask yourself – how might you:

  1. Slow the pace of lessons to ensure there is enough time for students to collaborate for themselves;

  2. Enable and encourage talk about collaboration to ensure students understand the how and why of collaboration;

  3. Design activities that exercise and develop students’ collaboration skills, and ensure they reflect on how it is developing;

  4. Display, praise and reward the use and growth of collaboration.

 

And if you do embed these 4 big ideas . . .

A quick look back to progression in classroom culture.

You have met this diagram in various formats during Phase 1, Playing the Learning Power Game. It charts progression in the 4 aspects of classroom culture (Relating, Talking, Constructing and Celebrating) from a teacher-focused classroom culture at the bottom to a fully-fledged learning-focused culture at the top.

If you are able to keep these 4 big ideas above in mind and embed them in your classroom culture, you will see that your classroom culture is around the fourth row, well on the way to being learning-friendly.

Now take a look at the Learning Chart sections where you will find plenty of ideas to try.

 

Continue Reading

Section 1: Collaboration and how it develops

1a) What is Collaboration?

Pair work, group work or teamwork are frequent features of classroom practice across all age ranges. But what are the essential features of this way of learning? How can students improve their collaborative behaviours in order to achieve better results?

In this session, we explore the subtleties of collaboration and the skills that make up teamwork. We consider a broad order in which such skills might be explained, orchestrated, commented on and modelled by teachers in classrooms to ensure the progressive development of students as collaborative learners.

There are many ways to define collaboration. In a learning context we have come to understand collaboration as being able to manage yourself effectively in the give and take of a collaborative venture, having a range of interpersonal skills that enable you to work and learn with and from others, being willing and able to contribute constructively and with sensitivity, and adding to and drawing strength from the team itself.

At its least sophisticated, it is little more than being cooperative. At its most sophisticated and complex levels it goes beyond learning ‘in a team’ and becomes learning ‘as a team’. It is an invaluable life skill.

In short…

Collaboration: Having both the skills and the inclination to contribute positively to group work in order to learn productively with and from others.

What do you think?

  • Are you aware of students whose lack of social skills limits their ability to cooperate, let alone collaborate, with others?
  • Are you aware of students who regard group work as an opportunity to allow others do all the work? (the social loafers,)
  • Are you aware of students who are keen to do all of the work themselves to the exclusion of others? (the job hogs)

Make a note of…Little_r

  • Students who do not trust others to contribute effectively
  • Students who are reluctant to contribute to group work

What does a well-formed habit look like?

Effective collaborators are adept at learning with and from others. They help to: shape the ideas of the team; decide what needs to be done; contribute to getting the job done; keep an eye on how things are going; improve team performance through reflection.

Screen Shot 2015-04-23 at 13.22.36

At-a-glance Collaboration card [extract] – Click image to view full screen

Find out more about Collaboration:

A well-formed collaboration habit includes being ready willing and able to:

  • Work effectively with others towards agreed, common goals, acting flexibly in response to circumstances.
  • Adopt different roles and responsibilities in pursuit of agreed goals and the well-being of the team.
  • Hold and express opinions coherently, compromising and adapting when appropriate.
  • Seek to understand what others are saying; sharing, challenging, supporting and building on ideas.

What do you think?

  • Do your students become increasingly like this as they move through your school?
  • What makes you say that?
  • What do you currently do in school that encourages students to develop their social learning skills?
  • What might you be doing to inhibit collaborative learning?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • Things you do to support collaboration
  • Things you do that might hinder collaboration

1b) How Collaboration might build when we nurture it.

Being collaborative isn’t something that switches on on good days and off on bad days. Being a good collaborator grows and builds when it’s nurtured and supported. Furthermore, being collaborative involves gaining control of a range of linked skills and emotions. Take a look at how progression in Collaboration might grow across six contributory aspects.

Cast your eye over the ‘big picture’ of growing Collaboration below. Then move on to finding out what the columns and the rows are all about.

Collaboration grid may 2016 - Collaboration grid - colour

Download grid as a pdf

1c) Unpick the columns; what contributes to a readiness to Collaborate?

The grid columns are things that might combine to make up the skills and attitudes of a Collaborator.

Overview of the gridCollaboration grid may 2016 - Collaboration grid - colour

Collaboration involves knowing how to learn with others, as part of a team, in situations where no one person knows all parts of the puzzle. This complicated yet essential learning habit develops in several different ways. First of all it hinges on social interaction; how well we get on together, whether we are patient with others and respect their views. Then how we are able to bounce off others to build ideas; making the most of several brains rather than one. Next, how we learn to be part of a team and to perform different roles when needed. Fourthly, how we talk to ourselves about learning with others, where our real understanding of the process is revealed. Fifthly, how we contribute to the process of actually getting things done. Not just being there but doing something helpful. And lastly how we contribute to improving team performance by evaluating not just outcomes but the process of getting there.

Take a closer look at what each column of the grid is about.

Collaboration grid may 2016 -Collaboration grid Columns_Page_11) Social interaction

How we interact socially in learning and working with others; the way in which we learn the social conventions of behaving in a group; taking turns to speak and contribute, listening to understand others; being patient with others and not hogging the limelight; stepping outside our own concerns and building the confidence of others and respecting their views; being able to manage and overcome the inevitable controversy as teams work creatively together; and thus being able to become a valuable sociable member of any team.

 

Collaboration grid may 2016 -Collaboration grid Columns_Page_2

2) Building ideas

Just being good mates in a team doesn’t lead to success. Teams have to understand how to build ideas together; to draw on the ideas of others, to be able to graciously set aside ideas that wouldn’t work, to spark off others to ensure new and better ideas get an airing. And somehow, in all this ‘togetherness’ people are able to retain their independent judgement and avoid being drawn into group think. Teams share and build ideas together; growing and improving possible solutions in order to reach their goals

 

 

Collaboration grid may 2016 -Collaboration grid Columns_Page_33) Working as a team

Working as a team is rather different to working in a team. It’s all about ‘teamness’ or ‘togetherness’. In order to work as a team people need to understand team roles, ti find out what role they are particularly good at, to take on a range of roles when needed and eventually be willing to play any role in a team to ensure the goal is reached. Being able to work as a team is influenced by how our self-perception and confidence grow, how we learn to trust, how we recognise the need for each other.

 

 

 

 

Collaboration grid may 2016 -Collaboration grid Columns_Page_44) Self talk

The voice of self awareness

Self-talk is what we say to ourselves as we learn. The statements capture what someone in each phase of the grid might be thinking. Students may use some of these phrases when talking with you, or in writing from time to time, but mostly self-talk goes on inside their heads. We have shown a small flavour of self-talk thoughts that teachers can encourage students to imitate. Some relate to standards, others to self-monitoring, or flexibility. All such self-talk is important in building a collaborative habit.

 

 

 

Collaboration grid may 2016 -Collaboration grid Columns_Page_55) Getting the job done

How teams achieve their goals by using the well-known learning process of Plan Do Review. Good teams have people who know that the first job is to be clear about what he task is really about. They are skilled in considering/creating/agreeing realistic goals to be achieved and which everyone has bought in to. Then the team have to plan how they will achieve the goal, how they will monitor their progress and methodology and how they will make sure the job is well done.

Collaboration grid may 2016 -Collaboration grid Columns_Page_66) Reviewing action

This aspect is about how teams learn how to improve. It’s the aspect of teamwork that is frequently left out altogether or given short shrift. But it’s the aspect of teamwork that helps teams build themselves into better teams. It includes evaluating how they performed as individuals in contributing to the work of the team and how/whether the team process worked to achieving the team goal. Importantly such reflection leads to serious re-planning of their ways of working. It’s meta learning at a team level. Good teams will be looking for what has become known as marginal gains. What little things can we do better/improve that will impact on the overall performance.

What do you think?

  • Do these contributory features of collaboration make sense to you?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • Things that you think might be missing from this big picture of collaboration

What do you think?

  • Do you think there’s an order in which these skills develop? Would it be the same order for every student?
  • Do you think these behaviours develop ‘naturally’ as children mature?
  • Do we need to intervene in order to support this positive development?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • Any behaviours you think develop naturally
  • Any behaviours you think may be missing from this picture of collaboration

1d) Unpick the rows; getting better at Collaborating.

Of course the development of collaboration doesn’t grow neatly up each column or even across the columns. However, it is possible to look at the grid another way and group cells together into five broad phases of dispositional growth. We have based this growth on Bloom’s taxonomy of the affective domain. By looking at the development of emotion and skill, the grid yields broad ways in which people may be inclined to behave: we call this inclination ‘mindedness’.

Here is our interpretation of how Collaborating might grow.

Collaboration grid may 2016 - Collaboration grid - colour

Meaning behind the phases

The phases are drawn from Bloom’s taxonomy of the affective domain.

Phase ‘Receives’ (purple) is about doing something because you are told or expected to.

Phase ‘Responds’ (blue) is about gaining interest and doing things more willingly.

Phase ‘Values’ (green) is a key phase since the student now sees the value of behaving in this way. It’s a win for them; to behave like this is in their interest. It’s in this phase that the behaviour becomes more secure.

Phase ‘Organises’ (yellow) is the phase in which the student capitalises on this ‘in their interest’ behaviour and gets themselves organised to use it positively.

Phase ‘Embodies’ (orange), known as ‘characterised’ in the original taxonomy. In this phase the student has made this behaviour their own. It has become part of their character; they can’t not do it and they have become highly skilled in doing it.

We urge you to see this progression as long term. Some phases will take years for people to work through; some will never be worked through. None of the phases are inevitable. There is a lifetime of development captured here. Nevertheless the role of a teacher or parent should surely be to encourage and enable this journey.

Lacks:

Collaboration grid may 2016 - Collaboration grid - Rows_Page_6

In this ‘Lacks’ (grey) phase, students are often unsure of themselves in a group. They often learn and play alongside other children but collaborating together is far more tricky. Their social skill may not be conducive to working with others either tending to push themselves forward and take control or shying away and saying/contributing little. They have much learning and adapting to do before they are really ready to work in a collaborative team.

Receives: Minded to begin to collaborate with others

Collaboration grid may 2016 - Collaboration grid - Rows_Page_5

In the Receives (purple) phase, students are making a big leap from being wary of others, being unaware of social conventions or any of the advantages of working/learning with others. Here they are collaborating with others because they are required to. There is much to be done in this phase: social skills, sharing ideas, working out what needs doing, playing their part and even thinking about how they have contributed to the team.

Responds: Minded to be part of a team

Collaboration grid may 2016 - Collaboration grid - Rows_Page_4

In the Responds (blue) phase students are willing to develop their understanding of what being part of a team involves, agreeing goals together, trying out different roles, broadening social skills to opening up others.

Values: Minded to function flexibly as part of a team

Collaboration grid may 2016 - Collaboration grid - Rows_Page_3

In the Values (green) phase students see/appreciate the value of a team member and honing their skills in different roles, planning action more carefully, and being flexible in their own views for the sake of the team. Once this phase is secure students are likely to develop further skills by having opportunities to work in this way.

Organises: Minded to learn in and as a team

Collaboration grid may 2016 - Collaboration grid - Rows_Page_2

In the Organises (yellow) phase, students organise themselves to work as part of a team. They learn that skilful teams manage conflict and that conflict and controversy are positive keys to involvement and creativity; that high-performing teams frequently check their progress and adjust their practice to stay on track.

Embodies: Minded to see Collaborating as a way of being.

Collaboration grid may 2016 - Collaboration grid - Rows_Page_1

In the Embodies (orange) phase, being a skilled team player is what characterises the student. They work happily and skilfully in any team, confident in their social, task development, planning, reviewing, and team evaluation strategies. A valuable member of any team.

What do you think?

  • Which phase of collaboration mindedness do most of your students fit into? They may of course be developing in more than one phase at a time.
  • Are some in the grey zone ? – i.e. collaboration is missing altogether.

Make a note of…Little_r

  • The students who don’t appear to be mainly in the grey zone

Preparation for the Learning Team meeting

Where are my students now?

  • Take a look at the Collaboration progression chart in your Learning Diary or
  • Download chart to colour in here
  • Colour in the cells where you think your students are secure.
  • Some will barely be on the chart while others may be quite a way up. Neat straight lines of secure behaviours are rare. But looking at your students in this way should give you an idea of what you need to work on.
  • Draw a red line across the chart to denote where you think most of the school’s students could and should reach by the time they leave.
  • Please take the results of these tasks with you to the Professional Learning Team session shown in Section 4
Continue Reading

Section 4: Team reflection and planning

Session agenda

1. Session objectives

What do we want to achieve? ( 5 mins)

2 Sharing classroom experiments

How did our experiments go? ( 20 mins)

Share

  • the changes in practice you tried
  • the changes in classroom culture you were hoping to achieve
  • how students reacted
  • what you learned
  • what next as a result

Probe

  • what was getting in the way?
  • what seemed difficult?
  • what would make it easier?
  • what made it work particularly well?
  • why it was successful?
  • changes in your behaviour

Impact (general)

  • improvements in students’ behaviour
  • increased focus
  • more enjoyment in learning
  • more/renewed interest in the subject
  • greater harmony in the classroom
  • more willingness to try, and try different ways
  • more positive about themselves as learners
  • Avoidance of…..
  • Improvements in……
  • Increases in…….
  • Little of no changes in…

Impact ( specific)

  • You could consider the behaviour-specific improvement indicators for the learning habit you were improving. (i.e. as shown for this behaviour in section 5c below)

3. Recapping on-line materials

What did we think of the materials? ( 15 mins)

Reactions to

  • The Revising progression grid
  • Where students are secure
  • Where students could be secure when they leave our school
  • Classroom culture ideas
  • Activities and talk ideas

4. Planning what to do

What do we need to do next? (10 mins )

Decide

  • Which ideas should we all adopt as a school strategy?
  • How the progression of revising should be built across the school. ie how the phases of revising might play out against key curriculum stages and even year groups.

5. Personal action planning

What am I going to do? ( 20 mins )

5a Consider

  • how you want your pupils to improve/develop/enhance their approach to revising?
  • what you are going to do to bring this about?
  • how you want to consolidate/develop your classroom culture for revising?
  • what you are going to do to bring this about?
  • develop your enquiry question.

Think of it like this…

If I do  XXXX will it improve/develop/enhance YYYY

This is the crunch question. Your pupils are unlikely to change unless you change!

Capture your learning enquiry as a question

Developing-an-enquiry-question-Revising

Developing-an-enquiry-question-Revising.pdf

5b Put a short enquiry plan together

Personal Action Plan-Revising

Personal-Action-Plan-Revising.pdf

5c Improvement indicators to consider for Revising

Purple (Show me. Tell me)

  • seems in less of a rush to finish quickly
  • spending longer time on tasks
  • can talk confidently about how they did something
  • shows a willingness to try again or try new ways

Blue (I’ll try)

  • an increased desire to do a good job
  • have overcome fear of mistakes and failure
  • knows the value of always checking if something is on the right lines or is right
  • have learned why standards (getting it right) are important

Green (I see why)

  • has an understanding of when something is ‘good enough’
  • recognises that learning involves constant rethinking and re-doing
  • has a tendency to ask themselves why they did it it that way

Yellow (I’ll make sure I do)

  • has a tendency to ask themselves whether there are different ways to improve something
  • tends to want to see if they can achieve at higher levels
  • always keep a eye on what and how they are doing something and edits as they go along

6. Evaluate team session

How did we do as a team? ( 5 mins )

  • Did we achieve our objectives?
  • Are we comfortable with what we are trying to achieve?
  • Any concerns at this point?
  • Next meeting date and time.
Continue Reading

Section 3: Blending Revising with content

So far, you have:

  • Looked at your students through the lens of the Revising learning chart

  • Gained a sense of what becoming better at Revising looks like

  • Explored a range of ideas and activities that will help to engage students with Revising

Now we look closely at how to blend improving students’ revising into the content you have to teach.

A. The principles behind any learning powered lesson

B. Big questions to ask about lesson design

C. Lesson planning in action…an exemplar revising focused task

Learning habits form through use and practice, but desirable habits survive and flourish better if students are aware of them, realise their value and strive to improve them. The curriculum through its lessons provides the rich and varied occasions for exercising learning habits.

A. The principles behind any learning powered lesson

Think of yourself as a learning power coach, helping your students to help themselves to develop their learning habits. Hence your lessons are much more likely to contain challenges and activities that get your students thinking and learning for themselves. You encourage students to explore challenging questions, problems or assertions and become observers of their own learning. You step back from telling and heavy scaffolding and instead try to mobilise your students’ learning behaviours. You are organising learning to let them take the strain.

Open Me

The SIX principles that lie behind teaching for learning power

1: Visible learning…Surfacing learning

You make it clear to students which learning habits and processes they are using. You try to make every aspect of the learning process as visible as possible through the language you use and through the words and images you display on the walls.

For example: 

Help students to become reflective and thoughtful about goals.

To evaluate progress towards the goal, display phrases like:

 

  • Do I think that’s coming along well.
  • Have I checked my emerging outcome against my original goals?
  • Am I still on track?
  • Did I have to amend my goals part way through? Why was that?
  • What am I going to do about . . . . . ?
  • Is there anything I could have done better, differently?
  • How might I get better at that? What would be a better/alternative way of doing it.
  • Am I satisfied with how it is going?

2: Dual focus teaching…blending content and process

You design activities that combine the dual objectives of ‘what’ will be learned and ‘how’ it will be learned. You make sure students know that the content they are learning is a way of giving their minds a useful workout. (The content is the vehicle for learning)

For example: 

Use the visible thinking routine

I used to think . . . . .,  Now I think . . . ,

Use routine to help students to reflect on how and why their thinking/understanding is changing:

  • Remind students of the topic you have been working on.
  • Ask them to respond to each of the sentence stems: I used to think…, Now, I think…

Alternatively ask students to write down their views at the beginning of a topic. Invite them to revisit & update their answer during and at the end in light of what has been learned.

Or, at the beginning of a lesson ask students to write down what they understand by a particular term that will be explored in the coming lesson (e.g. Phrase (English); Proof (Maths); Power (Science) etc). At the end of the lesson ask them to write down what they now understand by the term.

3: Emotional engagement…Capturing attention

Your lessons are designed to intrigue your students. Students don’t put in the effort unless their energy and attention are captured by what they are doing. You capture your students’ emotional engagement by giving them more of a stake in the process of learning.

For example:

Try a range of Thunks at the start of a lesson to capture attention and force a rethink

For example: If cows were cleverer, would we still eat them?

There are plenty to choose from in The Little Book of Thunks by Ian Gilbert

What is a Thunk? A Thunk is a beguiling question about everyday things that stops you in your tracks but helps you start to look at the world in a whole new light.

4: Handling uncertainty…Challenge

You have realised from your own life that what is engaging tends to be what is challenging. Since you see education as a preparation for a learning life, you help students to learn how to handle increasing degrees of complexity and uncertainty.

For example:

Use success criteria to revise their learning

Make it clear to students what you are looking for in a piece of learning and give them opportunities to check their ‘work ‘against the criteria, either individually or in pairs. Ensure the criteria are linked to the original learning intention. Knowing what is expected encourages students to stay on focus and to revise their work to meet the criteria. Invite students to create success criteria themselves in order to encourage ownership.
Include

  • what students should know
  • how much, and how, they should include opinions, judgements and their own thinking
  • what skills they should be able to demonstrate
  • how to link the outcome to the original learning intention.

5: Relationships…Working together

Learning is both a sociable and a solitary activity, and you offer your students opportunities to experience both. You develop interdependent learners who know how to handle themselves in collaborative groups and able to move around in the social space of learning to best effect.

For example:

Use this as a ‘working together’ plenary session.

Invite pairs or small groups of students to predict what the next lesson will focus on, based on their reflections from this and previous series of lessons.

Answers could be given in as the students leave the lesson and the answer revealed at the start of the next. You could even introduce a regular ‘predict-the-learning’ segment in your teaching.

Extend this idea by asking students to connect and sequence a series of lessons together

6: Reflection and responsibility…Taking charge

You understand that students have to learn how to manage and organise their own learning and that the way to do this is by giving them increasingly demanding opportunities to do so. You orchestrate students taking charge of their learning by expecting them to plan what they do, distil meaning from it, and revise it accordingly.

For example:

Use learning mats

at the start of this process to prompt the use of and reflection on revising.

A checklist for lesson planning based on these six principles.

Does the lesson plan:

  • Make it clear to students which learning behaviours are being activated?
  • Match and blend the learning behaviour with content?
  • Include a tactic to captivate students’ attention?
  • Have sufficiently challenging learning activities to sustain interest for all?
  • Offer choice on how students could interact on these tasks?
  • Embed aspects of planning, reflecting and revising for content and process?

What do you think?

  • Which of these six principles are a regular feature of your planning?
  • What do you make of principle 2? Is it the most tricky of the six? The following section B is mostly about this aspect of planning.
  • Look at the checklist in the green box above this one: Do your lesson plans capture these six aspects of an effective learning experience?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • Which of the six principles might need to be given greater prominence in your planning.

 

 

B.   Big questions to ask about lesson design.

Skim read or leave this section if you have met it in other units because… the section applies to any learning behaviour. i.e. not specific to Revising.

 

What we teach and how we teach it (the enacted curriculum) are intertwined and offer teachers a lot of freedom. It is here that you can start applying a learning power filter and deploy a unique combination of content and learning tasks.

Open Me

Prelude

In conventional lessons where the teacher remains the focus of attention and the initiator of all activity, and where the epistemic dimension (the conditions for acquiring knowledge) is not acknowledged, students gain habits of compliance and dependence, rather than curiosity and self-reliance.

In developing learning power, teachers are making conscious choices about which habits to introduce and stretch and how best to couple these with content so that lessons become more interesting and challenging. Through such overt coupling of content and specific types of process, students come to know, understand and take control of their learning behaviours – they knowingly use and develop the whole range of learning behaviours.

All lessons function on two levels, they have twin intentions. On the one hand there is content to be acquired, and on the other there are learning behaviours to be exercised in pursuit of this content. The factor that differentiates a standard lesson that effectively ‘delivers the content’ from a learning powered lesson is that the teacher has to think, in advance, about:

  • the learning behaviours that are necessary for successful content acquisition;
  • the design of activities /tasks that will stimulate these behaviours;
  • how learners could reflect on and evaluate their use of these behaviours.

In designing such lessons you have to dare to think differently and flip round your usual lesson design thinking.

  A turn-around in lesson design

Think in two dimensions at once – the content dimension and the learning behaviour dimension. It means turning your thinking around – from teaching to learning.

Or put another way

Think to yourself;

  • what content?
  • using which learning behaviour(s)?
  • via an activity to stretch both?

 

Lesson design questions… one by one

Here the general rules of lesson design have been related to the learning behaviour…revising.

Stage 1. What content do students need to learn?

What content has to be learned? …..Think outcomes.

  • Use standard lesson planning tools:
    • What are students going to be able to do/learn?…think objectives
    • How will they know if they been successful?… think success criteria
  • While keeping an obvious eye on
    • What do they already know?….think previous learning.

 

Stage 2. How will they best learn it?

Using which learning behaviours?

This is the new bit 

Not the usual second step but nonetheless a vital second step where the aim is to weave content acquisition with learning behaviours. The content is the vehicle for exercising the learning behaviours and the learning behaviours accelerate the content acquisition.

Using which learning behaviours?…Think types of learning behaviours

  • Which learning behaviour(s) will help these students get closer to understanding this content?…think learning behaviour charts.
  • Which aspect of, say, revising, lends itself to achieving these outcomes?…think progression columns.
  • How skilled are these students in using this learning behaviour …think progression phases/rows

Say something like this to yourself .…My students need to achieve xxx. At this stage we could get closer to this content by using revising. Most of my students are able to use xxx phase (e.g. respond/blue) revising approaches confidently.

Stage 3. What type of task/activity will stretch the learning?

Which type of task…Think types of task. 

Pick up your thinking from stage 2; 

My students need to achieve xxx. At this stage we could get closer to this content by using revising. Most of my students would be able to use xxx phase (e.g. blue/responds phase) revising approaches confidently.

And now think about the sort of task/activity you might develop/design so as to:

    • orchestrate a problem-solving activity to enable students’ understanding of xyz content without telling them;

 

    • intrigue them with something that is open to several interpretations;

 

    • stimulate their curiosity;

 

    • grab their attention…visually and aurally;

 

    • allow them to stay stuck before I ask them how they are thinking;

 

    • offer as a nudge to get them thinking differently that doesn’t give the answer away;

 

    • leave it as a problem hanging in the air to which we will return later;

 

  • make links between the challenge, and what and how we are learning in this lesson.

The challenge isn’t about the inherent complexity of the subject matter but about how the content is orchestrated to encourage students to use their learning habits to resource their solution.

Think…what/how much information/content do I need to give/reveal? At what point? In what form? To what end?

Say something like this to yourself .

  • my students need to achieve xxx.
  • at this point we could get closer to this content by using revising.
  • most of my students are able to use xxx phase (e.g. respond/blue phase) revising approaches confidently.
  • What type of task would stretch their revising but assist them with the content…without me just telling them!

 

 

To summarise…the heart of the lesson


It’s the question ‘using which learning behaviours?’ that causes you to think differently about the lesson planning.

  • You ask – as always – what are the anticipated objectives/intentions?
  • The verbs in your resulting objectives will give you clues about the types of task/methodology that will get students there and the sorts of learning behaviours your students will need to contribute to this learning endeavour.

You are designing the task in a way that requires students to contribute their learning ‘powers’ / behaviours. The tasks you design will hook into their learning ‘powers’ and help them to improve them.

Say something like this to yourself:

I am going to think content, learning behaviour and task together:

  • Revising will help students to better access the content;
  • The aspect of revising (column) and phase (row) that would fit best is (for example) Reflection in Action, Purple phase, “Checks what they are doing against given criteria”.
  • The type of task/activity that would best stretch both content and learning behaviour, intrigue, challenge, bring people together and give responsibility to students is………
  • Think….what information do I need to reveal/give, in what form, at what point, and what do I want students to do with it?

What do you think?

  • What strikes you about this way of planning with learning behaviours in mind?
  • Where are the potential stumbling blocks?
  • How will you decide which learning behaviour(s) you are going to foreground in your objectives?

Consider a lesson you are about to teach…Little_r

  • What is the content?
  • Which learning behaviour(s), if missing, would make accessing the content very difficult / impossible?
  • How could you blend reference to this learning behaviour(s) into the learning objectives?
  • Can you design a task that will help students to access the content and exercise the key learning behaviour(s) you have identified?

 

 

C. Lesson planning in action – an exemplar, revising focused, task.

How do we design tasks that stretch Revising and assist students to approach the content more productively? We cover this in three ways:

  • 1 shows the phases of a lesson where revising is the driving behaviour;
  • 2 considers a simple lesson plan template that can be used for any lesson and distils the Twin Towers lesson into this format;
  • 3 invites you to extend your thinking about the technique into other aspects of the curriculum.

 

Open Me

1. A description of the phases of a lesson built around Revising

Look through the lesson below. It uses a slow-reveal strategy to encourage students to speculate based on limited information, only to have to reappraise those thoughts as further information is revealed. To work effectively, it needs an image that contains a surprise, a contradiction, something misleading so that first impressions are unlikely to be correct.

The lesson focuses primarily on the first column of the Revising chart – Attitude to Change. It creates a situation in which a change of mind is almost inevitable.

Notice how, despite the focus on learners changing their views as the evidence is revealed, other learning behaviours ‘bubble up’ as the lesson proceeds. It reminds us that learning behaviours don’t function in isolation, that an effective learner not only has a wide range of learning behaviours to call on but also the flexibility to move seamlessly from one to another as required.

Firstly, the lesson plan layout that we are using here:

What’s happening here?

This lesson plan template looks at a lesson episode by episode, as in the other modules. There are sections for Teacher Action,(what you do) Student Action,(what you are expecting students to do) Teacher talk (what you will say to nudge learning along) and Learning Behaviours activated (the learning behaviours that this type of activity/nudging comments will stretch). The image/information that is being used by the teacher at each stage of the lesson is shown in the box top left.

NB. The Learning Behaviours identified in the banner at the bottom of the slides identify the learning behaviours the episode will stretch. Note that they can change from episode to episode since none of the behaviours act in isolation. 

 

2. Now to the lesson itself:

Episode 1

What’s happening here?

 Students are invited to speculate on a range of possibilities based on very limited information,. Just think about this for a minute… asking students to speculate activates a blend of noticing, imagining, inferential reasoning, and group working skills. There’s a lot going on in students heads! But it’s the way you are doing this, through slow reveal, that will encourage students to develop as flexible learners.

In order to scaffold and nourish this noticing and speculation this episode uses Think, Pair, Share together with the VTR ‘What makes you say that?’

Think/ Pair /Share gives students time to think about it for themselves before they get caught up in the cut and thrust of group work, a chance to refine their thoughts in the Pair stage, and again in the Share phase. The visible thinking routine ‘what makes you say that’ encourages students to offer explanations and evidence to justify what they are speculating.

In the bottom blue box, the Learning Behaviours being activated are identified as:

  • To notice detail, speculate on possibilities and to explain their ideas to each other.

But what you are working towards in terms of the Revising disposition is ‘Recognises learning involves constant rethinking/redoing’. (Green/Values level)

 

Episode 2

What’s happening here?

This is a key part of the lesson. The addition of a new perspective gives the learner cause to, possibly, amend their first idea. The second reveal provides evidence to support some speculations (it is a river bank in a city) and to dispel others (it is looking out to sea). How does this second bit of the picture change how you are seeing the three people in Episode 1?

In the bottom blue box, the Learning Behaviours are, at this stage, identified as:

  • To change (revise) their outlook in light of new information. 

However, by looking at information in the progression charts the behaviours you are activating could be described much more deeply as:

  • To attempt to change or rethink something and amend things

Such augmented explanations can be found in the:

  • Revising chart, Receives and Responds phases: ‘To attempt to change or rethink something and amend things’ 

Episode 3

What’s happening here?

The teacher is encouraging speculation here. The evidence is flimsy and inconclusive, but is in contrast to the weather shown in Episodes 1 and 2. The use of ‘Could Be’ language encourages students to come up with a range of possible explanations. The teacher may well say things like: “That’s an interesting idea, but if that is not true, what else might explain it” to gain alternative interpretations.

In the bottom blue box, the Learning Behaviours are, at this stage, identified as:

  • To speculate (and listen) about a range of possibilities

In terms of the revising progression chart your wider purpose is to help students to work towards  being able to ‘Edits as they go along. Thinks on their feet within the given variables.’ Green/values.

Episode 4

 

What’s happening here?

A shift of focus here, away from what students could see in the previous Episodes, towards speculation that requires Empathy, and ‘seeing’ beyond the image. Who are these people? What can we infer from the way they are sitting? What might this mean? Do they know the first three people in Episode 1?

In the bottom blue box, the Learning Behaviours are, at this stage, identified as:

  • To use their noticing and empathy skills to speculate on the relationships

In terms of the revising progression chart your wider purpose could be to help students to work towards  being able to ‘Rethink and restart to change direction’. Yellow/organises.

Episode 5

What’s happening here?

This is the key slide – it either dispels or supports the hypotheses that have been developing. Thus far the teacher has been encouraging speculation and accepting all answers as possible, but now there is a focus for what the observers in Episodes 1 and 4 are looking at, there is an explanation of the cloud in Episode 3. Few students will have seen this coming – the relaxed demeanour of the observers on this bank is in stark contrast to the tragedy unfolding on the opposite bank. The visible thinking routine: “I used to think . . . . . .    But now I think . . . . .” is used here to help students to structure an explanation about how their views have changed.

In the bottom blue box, the Learning Behaviours are, at this stage, identified as:

  • To make links to what they already know in order to understand what is going on in the image, and challenges them to refine their initial thinking in light of this.

In terms of the revising progression chart your aspiration for your students could be to help them to work towards  being able to be ‘Constantly on the look out for how to improve/change/reinvent something’. Orange/Embodies.

Episode 6

What’s happening here?

Putting it all together. Using the visible thinking routine See/Think/Wonder helps students to notice, reason and/or imagine, and question. Prioritising the best STW’s is an evaluation activity. Beginning to seek answers to the best ‘Wonders’ frames future enquiry.

The underlying message to be distilled here is that first impressions, based on partial or incomplete information, are invariably less than perfect. As more information becomes available, views are refined and clarity slowly emerges, but only if we are prepared to let go of those first impressions.

In the bottom blue box, the Learning Behaviours are, at this stage, identified as:

  • To distil their thinking, to reflect on how additional information frequently forces a change of perspective, or gives rise to a further range of questions.

In terms of the revising progression chart your aspiration for your students could be to help them to work towards  being able to ‘Question and moderate normal rules/ideas to detect errors and improve things’ Yellow/Organises.

 

 

What do you think?

  • Have you thought of a lesson as a blend of teacher actions, student actions, learning behaviours, and teacher talk before?
  • The key box is the learning behaviours box across the bottom. Could you write the contents of that box for each Episode in one of your lessons?
  • How could you use the slow reveal strategy to advantage in your own classroom?
  • What image would you choose?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • Your initial reactions to the slow reveal strategy.
  • A situation in which you might use it.

2 A distillation of this lesson.

This is a simple streamlined use-able tool that includes:

  • What you do (teacher action);
  • What students do (student action);
  • What the learning behaviours being called upon are (learning behaviours);
  • What you say (learning talk) to nudge the learning behaviour along.

The format is divided into episodes to show the change of purpose, action and use of learning behaviour across the course of the lesson.

Download a blank lesson plan as a MS Word document: Lesson Planning Grid

Here you will find the template populated with the episodes explored in section 1 above. This format helps you to gain a swift overview of the lesson from the various perspectives.

What do you think?

  • What are your reactions to this lesson plan template?
  • Does planning for four aspects – teacher action, student action, learning behaviours, teacher talk – seem useful?
  • How does sequencing the lesson as ‘episodes’ help or hinder planning?
  • Which do you prefer – the blue box approach in section 1 or the grid in this section.

Make a note of…Little_r

  • The extent to which your existing planning template enables you to think about lessons in this way.
  • What you would like / need to add to it.

 

3 Extend your thinking about this slow reveal technique

Consider the 4 images below. They are:

  1. “An Experiment on a Bird in the Air Pump” by Joseph Wright;
  2. Street art by Julian Beever – all of the Batman bit is painted on the pavement;
  3. A b&w photo of the great 1906 earthquake in San Francisco;
  4. An image from Erik Johansson’s website.

Consider each in turn. How would you carve each image up – what would you reveal first, then second . . .

Can you find a reveal sequence that gives very little away in the early stages, or even better that initially misleads the viewer?

Which curriculum area might make use of each of these images?

Do you know of any other images that relate to your planned curriculum that can be treated in the same way?

 

The Cover-Up, 2013

What do you think?

  • Where / when / why might you use the slow reveal strategy?
  • How will you ensure that the slow reveal is an integral part of the lesson, and not just a ‘catchy’ activity before the ‘serious’ work begins?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • Which class you might try the slow reveal with.
  • When you will try it.

 

 

Continue Reading

Section 2: Building Revising-friendly classroom cultures

Teachers as habit formers

As teachers we are in the habit-forming business. What we say, what we display on classroom walls, what we celebrate, praise or dismiss, what we model or how we design learning activities will all influence the ways in which students learn, perform and behave. Classroom cultures have a huge influence on students’ learning as you will remember from Playing the Learning Power Game.

Creating a Revising-friendly classroom culture

As a result of section 1 of this module . . .

You have learned about Revising and how it grows. You have met the revising progression chart (opposite) and considered the skills that your students have already mastered and those that might need some further attention.

This section offers a catalogue of teaching ideas, organised in relation to the phases of development in the progression chart, that you can use to sharpen your students’ revising skills.

But before you dip into the catalogue, let’s take a moment to consider whether your existing classroom culture is sufficiently revising-friendly to allow students’ revising skills to flourish and develop.

 

Is your classroom culture ready for Revising?

Let’s go back to a diagram you may have met in the latter stages of Phase 1 Playing the Learning Power Game.

It is a reminder of what a revising-friendly classroom culture looks like in terms of the 4 aspects of classroom culture (Relating, Talking, Constructing, Celebrating).

A revising-friendly classroom culture

Here is a selection of features that might begin to shape the emotional climate of your classroom to encourage revising.

The diagram has 4 sections:

  • Top – strategies you could build into the way you teach to stimulate revising;
  • Right – indications of the sort of language you might use to stimulate revising;
  • Bottom – ways in which you might celebrate / praise students’ use of revising;
  • Left – things that you need to enable students to do.

Take time to download the diagram and consider which of these aspects are already a regular feature in your classroom, and which could easily be introduced to make the culture even more revising-friendly.

Blending these ideas

Ask yourself:

How might you harness some or more of the ideas in the revising-friendly culture diagram . . .

 

 

 

to ready your classroom for building your students’ revising skills

As you begin to explore the teaching ideas for each phase of development, keep these big 4 ideas in mind. Ask yourself – how might you:

  1. Slow the pace of lessons to ensure there is enough time for students to review and revise for themselves;

  2. Enable and encourage talk about revising to ensure students understand the how and why of revising;

  3. Design activities that exercise and develop students’ revising skills, and ensure they reflect on how it is developing;

  4. Display, praise and reward the use and growth of revising.

 

And if you do embed these 4 big ideas . . .

A quick look back to progression in classroom culture.

You have met this diagram in various formats during Phase 1, Playing the Learning Power Game. It charts progression in the 4 aspects of classroom culture (Relating, Talking, Constructing and Celebrating) from a teacher-focused classroom culture at the bottom to a fully-fledged learning-focused culture at the top.

If you are able to keep these 4 big ideas above in mind and embed them in your classroom culture, you will see that your classroom culture is around the fourth row, well on the way to being learning-friendly.

Now take a look at the Learning Chart sections where you will find plenty of ideas to try.

Continue Reading

Section 1: Revising and how it develops

1a) What do we mean by Revising?

However well prepared learners are, they have to expect the unexpected. They have to have the readiness to revise as they go along. Good learners are able to change their plans and think on their feet. They are able to be flexible. To be effective at revising, learners need to monitor how things are going and periodically review where they have got to.

Monitoring is the art of looking over your own shoulder as you’re working away at a problem, asking yourself how it’s going.

Getting better at monitoring (‘reflection in action’) involves cultivating the little voice of self-awareness that keeps the strategic goals in mind, and is ready to change tack if it seems appropriate. A teacher who decides to throw away the lesson plan on the spur of the moment and go with the interesting discussion which is developing, is monitoring. Students can pick up the habit from people who can model it; who have learnt how to learn aloud, i.e. to externalise the thought processes of the vigilant monitor.

Reviewing (‘reflection on action’) means stopping every so often to take stock of progress, and to ensure that any emerging product—an artwork, an essay, a draft business plan—is on track. Reviewing requires the ability to look at your own work with the critical eye of an editor, and not be afraid of the possibility that some corrections may be needed. A writer may put a piece of work aside for a while and then come back to look at it afresh. An athlete may sit down and look at the video of her starting technique to see if any adjustments need to be made. But reviewing is what the low-achieving maths student, for example, is very often unable to do.

Extract from Building Learning Power. Guy Claxton 2002

1b) What does being a good Reviser involve?

A well formed Revising habit involves being ready, willing, and able to:

  • Self-monitor how things are going, keeping an eye on the goal
  • Expect the unexpected, having a readiness to re-shape, re-order, re-form plans to take account of new circumstances.
  • Remain alive to new, unforeseen opportunities and ideas
  • Look at what you are doing with a critical eye
  • Strive to be the best you can be
  • Make sure things are on track and make improvements along the way.

So at a less abstract level, students need to learn how to deal with change, emotionally and practically. With an inflexible frame of mind they are unlikely to recognise the need to change their ideas or the way they do something. They also need to know what ‘good’ looks like; how to keep an eye on how things are going and the willingness to evaluate how things went against external standards. When looked at from these diverse angles, growing revising moves well beyond encouraging a student to ‘have another go’.

The Revising grid below takes account of the constituent parts of building the habit of Revising

Our progression grid for Revising has 6 components:

Revising grid may 2916 - Revising grid - colour

Download grid as a pdf

1c) Unpicking the columns; what contributes to a readiness to revise?

The grid columns are things that might combine to make up the skills and attitudes of a reviser.

Revising grid may 2916 - Revising grid - colourOverview of the grid

Revising is about the way we work on something to improve it. Whether it be icing a cake, solving a tricky maths problem or creating a well-crafted essay, all require effort, retries and determination to satisfy ourselves that the result pleases us. How we tackle such a job isn’t just a case of monitoring as we go along or reviewing the result: it will be influenced by other qualities. Our attitude to change, whether we have a sense of quality and what sort of validation we need. The grid intertwines these important contributors to our growth in the habit of Revising.

The learning guru Royce Sadler put it like this: “Students need to be able to judge the quality of what they are producing and be able to regulate what they are doing during the doing itself”.

Take a closer look at what each column of the grid is about

Revising grid may 2916 - Revising grid - columns_Page_11) Attitude to change

How we relate to the change process

For many of us, doing things differently is scary and only for the bold and confident. But if we want students to enjoy achieving their best learning outcomes, we need to scaffold that process by building confidence – helping students move beyond their comfort zone and becoming more flexible as a learner. In the early phases students adapt what they are doing because they are being told and/or supported to do so. But this support pays off at the ‘value’ phase (green) when students feel positive about their efforts and realise learning is all about rethinking and adjusting and redoing, rather than getting it right first time. By the ‘organises’ phase (yellow), students are ready, willing, and able to move beyond making relatively small changes to making wholesale changes or starting again on a different tack.

Revising grid may 2916 - Revising grid - columns_Page_22) Sense of standards

How we relate to standards of excellence, quality, and correctness

The next contributory factor in revising what we are doing has to do with how we view quality; whether we have a sense of standards; our view of what’s good, bad or indifferent. In the early phases students accept what they are told about by teachers; what something needs to look like, be like, feel like. Schools are full of them – objectives, criteria, steps to success, outcomes – and constantly trying to achieve them can be dispiriting. But with support and encouragement students are able to begin to think for themselves what makes something good and determine their own standards.

Revising grid may 2916 - Revising grid - columns_Page_33) Self-talk

The voice of self awareness

Self-talk is what we say to ourselves as we learn. The statements capture what someone in each phase of the grid would be thinking. Students may use some of these phrases when talking with you, or in writing from time to time, but mostly self-talk goes on inside their heads. We have shown a small flavour of self-talk thoughts that teachers can encourage students to imitate. Some relate to standards, others to self-monitoring, or flexibility. All such self-talk is important in building a revising habit.

Revising grid may 2916 - Revising grid - columns_Page_44) Reflection IN action

Checking of how things are going

This column is about how we monitor what’s happening as we go along; keeping a weather eye on how things are going. Students need help to do this well. They need to know what they are looking for, what they are tracking. Should they look for good things or bad, for feelings, for whether they understand…? It’s a minefield. The early phases shown here relate to monitoring what you are doing against known criteria, and checking the process of doing something itself. Students need these props in the early phases. It’s only in the ‘valuing’ ( green) phase that they become skilled at editing as they go along, having had practice with checklists and criteria in earlier phases.

Look particularly at the difference between ‘value’ and ‘organised’. In the ‘value’ phase the amends, revisions, and re-tries are being done with the original aim/goal/ objective in mind. In the ‘organised’ phase students are prepared to ditch the original plan, ask hard questions, change the rules and change direction. It’s a big and important shift in becoming an independent learner.

Revising grid may 2916 - Revising grid - columns_Page_55) Reflection ON action

The inclination to reflect on what we have achieved

This is the essence of learning from experience although sadly it is not a common inclination. The key here is not simply reflecting on what happened and whether we could have improved, but whether we take heed of such lessons and behave differently next time. This is not a natural skill and will need careful structuring and nurturing. Notice that the early phases are about what happened and are heavily scaffolded. By green students are asking why they did it that way, and by yellow they are challenging those familiar ways of working and rethinking the how in order to achieve better outcomes. It’s a breakout moment.

Revising grid may 2916 - Revising grid - columns_Page_66) Recognising external validation

How we relate to external validation.

The last constituent of revising has to do with how we need and use external validation – the need for a legitimate authority source to confirm that what we are doing is right. When we are chasing facts we need to be sure they are correct. When we are using standards we need to be sure they are sound. In the early phases this authority normally comes from parents and teachers. As students move through the phases there is a move to seeking out experts, dictionaries and original sources. (The internet invariably plays a role here but while it might be a great place to start it’s a terrible place to finish! It needs to be used with discernment.) Sources of legitimate authority plays into how we revise and improve our learning.

What do you think?

  • What have you learned about revising from these descriptions?
  • What have you had confirmed?
  • What surprised you?
  • How have your views changed?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • Any ideas for practical classroom experiments that these descriptions have triggered
  • Which column your students are most secure in.

1d) Unpicking the rows; getting better at Revising.

Of course the development of revising does not grow neatly up each column or evenly across the phases in the grid. The five broad phases of dispositional growth (purple – orange) are affective ways in which people may be inclined to behave: we call this inclination ‘mindedness’.

Here is our interpretation of how Revising might grow.

Revising grid may 2916 - Revising grid - colour

Meaning behind the phases

The phases are drawn from Bloom’s taxonomy of the affective domain.

Phase ‘Receives’ (purple) is about doing something because you are told or expected to.
Phase ‘Responds’ (blue) is about gaining interest and doing things more willingly.
Phase ‘Values’ (green) is a key phase since the student now sees the value of behaving in this way. It’s a win for them; to behave like this is in their interest. It’s in this phase that the behaviour becomes more secure.
Phase ‘Organises’ (yellow) is the phase in which the student capitalises on this ‘in their interest’ behaviour and gets themselves organised to use it positively.
Phase ‘Embodies’ (orange), known as ‘characterised’ in the original taxonomy. In this phase the student has made this behaviour their own. It has become part of their character; they can’t not do it and they have become highly skilled in doing it.

We urge you to see this progression as long term. Some phases will take years for people to work through; some will never be worked through. None of the phases are inevitable. There is a lifetime of development captured here. Nevertheless the role of a teacher or parent should surely be to encourage and enable this journey.

Lacks: Minded to ‘just do things’

Revising grid may 2916 - Revising Grid - Rows_Page_6

In this ‘Lacks’ (grey) phase, students are not necessarily aware of doing things well or differently. Once they get going on something they may change it but more for the joy of just doing it. Outcomes maybe rushed or lack finesse, but once completed there may be little interest in revisiting it or in any comments they are offered. External standards are not yet a feature of their world.

Receives: Minded to check what they do.

Revising grid may 2916 - Revising Grid - Rows_Page_5

 

In the Receives (purple) phase, students begin to make checks on how they are doing against given criteria when prompted. They can talk about what they did and sometimes how. They rely on their teachers or parents to validate what they do/have done.

Responds: Minded to understand standards.

Revising grid may 2916 - Revising Grid - Rows_Page_4
In the Responds (blue) phase students have overcome a fear of mistakes and are more able and willing to monitor what they are doing. They begin to develop the idea of ‘good’ themselves and to understand why given standards are important. They respond positively to supportive feedback and talk reflectively about how they could improve with encouragement.

Values: Minded to value revising

Revising grid may 2916 - Revising Grid - Rows_Page_3
In the Values (green) phase, students understand the importance of keeping a close eye on progress in order to achieve high-quality outcomes that meet their goals. They see the point in making changes in the light of the original goal or external standard or internal feedback. They understand the need to learn from previous experiences and realise that learning is all about changing understandings; not just knowing stuff. In so doing they widen the scope of external validation.

Organises: Minded to actively seek alternative strategies

Revising grid may 2916 - Revising Grid - Rows_Page_2
In the Organises (yellow) phase revising has become a skilful habit; where revising itself raises more questions than answers. Yes, progress is kept under review but now students question the original goal of the activity. They look more widely for validation and may well change to a more productive strategy or a different goal. They use critical feedback positively and are keen to look back on what and how they achieved what they did in order to learn from the experience.

Embodies: Minded to exploit previous experience to the full

Revising grid may 2916 - Revising Grid - Rows_Page_1
In the Embodies (orange) phase, students make ongoing checks and amends, and major rethinking, in order to meet their own, often more exacting, standards of achievement. Now they tend not to need the validation of others (marks, grades, exams, quality feedback) because their own critical sense of standards acts as their barometer. They adapt readily to changing circumstances and always reflect on what and how they have done something with the explicit intention of doing it better, more efficiently / differently in the future.

What do you think?

  • What has struck you about the act of revising having read the descriptions above?
  • Which phase do you operate in?
  • What makes you say that?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • What you might do to assist your students to make headway in their revising behaviour.
  • Any practical ideas the text has triggered.

 

 

Preparation for the Learning Team meeting

Where are my students now?

  • Take a look at the Revising progression chart in your Learning Diary or
  • Download grid to colour in here
  • Colour in the cells where you think your students are secure.
  • Some will barely be on the chart while others may be quite a way up. Neat straight lines of secure behaviours are rare. But looking at your students in this way should give you an idea of what you need to work on.
  • Draw a red line across the chart to denote where you think most of the school’s students could and should reach by the time they leave.
  • Please take the results of these tasks with you to the Professional Learning Team session shown in Section 4
Continue Reading

Section 4: Team reflection and planning

Session agenda

1. Session objectives

What do we want to achieve? ( 5 mins)

2. Sharing classroom experiments

How did our experiments go? ( 20 mins)

Share

  • the changes in practice you tried
  • the changes in classroom culture you were hoping to achieve
  • how students reacted
  • what you learned
  • what next as a result

Probe

  • what was getting in the way?
  • what seemed difficult?
  • what would make it easier?
  • what made it work particularly well?
  • why it was successful?
  • changes in your behaviour

Talk about impact

  • greater willingness to try, and try different ways
  • Avoidance of…..
  • Improvements in……
  • Increases in…….
  • Little to no changes in…

3. Recapping on-line materials

What did we think of the materials? ( 15 mins)

Reactions to

  • The Resourcing learning progression grid
  • Where students are secure
  • Where students could be secure when they leave our school
  • Classroom culture ideas
  • Activities and talk ideas

4. Planning what to do

What do we need to do next? ( 10 mins )

Decide

  • Which ideas should we all adopt as a school strategy?
  • How the progression of Resource Learning should be built across the school. ie how the phases of Resource Learning might play out against key stages and even year groups.

5. Personal action planning

What am I going to do? ( 20 mins )

5a.Consider

  • how you want your pupils to improve/develop/enhance their approach to Resourcing Learning?
  • what you are going to do to bring this about?
  • how you want to consolidate/develop your classroom culture for Resourcing Learning?
  • what you are going to do to bring this about?
  • develop your enquiry question.

Think of it like this…

If I do  XXXX will it improve/develop/enhance YYYY

This is the crunch question. Your pupils are unlikely to change unless you change!

Capture your learning enquiry as a question

Developing-an-enquiry-question-Resourcing Learning

Developing-an-enquiry-question-Resourcing-Learning.pdf

5b.Put a short enquiry plan together

Personal Action Plan-Resourcing Learning

Personal-Action-Plan-Resourcing-Learning.pdf

5c. Discuss which of these possible impacts on students have been observed:

Purple (Show me. Tell me)

  • increasingly willing to watch how other people do things
  • growing willingness to seek information/ideas from others
  • increasing confident to try out/experiment with a growing range of classroom resources

Blue (I’ll try)

  • happy to use previously untried strategies or resources
  • better able to match the right resource to the right job
  • increasingly chooses own strategies or resources

Green (I see why)

  • increasingly able to select the right resource for a job/task
  • better able to select and combine ideas from others
  • now realises when other/more/different resources may be necessary to get the job done

Yellow (I’ll make sure I do)

  • has become aware of imitating others as an effective learning strategy
  • although aware of the value of resources in learning they take steps not to become over reliant on them.
  • increasingly able to access a wide range of sources of information

6. Evaluate team session

How did we do as a team? ( 5 mins )

  • Did we achieve our objectives?
  • Are we comfortable with what we are trying to achieve?
  • Any concerns at this point?
  • Next meeting date and time.

 

Continue Reading

Section 3: Blending Resourcing Learning with content

So far, you have:

  • Looked at your students through the lens of the Resourcing Learning chart
  • Gained a sense of what becoming better at Resourcing Learning looks like
  • Explored a range of ideas and activities that will help to engage students with Resourcing Learning

Now we look closely at how to blend improving students’ Resourcing Learning into the content you have to teach.

A. The principles behind any learning powered lesson

B. Big questions to ask about lesson design

C. Lesson planning in action…an exemplar Resourcing Learning focused task

Learning habits form through use and practice, but desirable habits survive and flourish better if students are aware of them, realise their value and strive to improve them. The curriculum through its lessons provides the rich and varied occasions for exercising learning habits.

A. The principles behind any learning powered lesson

Think of yourself as a learning power coach, helping your students to help themselves to develop their learning habits. Hence your lessons are much more likely to contain challenges and activities that get your students thinking and learning for themselves. You encourage students to explore challenging questions, problems or assertions and become observers of their own learning. You step back from telling and heavy scaffolding and instead try to mobilise your students’ learning behaviours. You are organising learning to let them take the strain.

Open Me

The SIX principles that lie behind teaching for learning power

1: Visible learning…Surfacing learning

You make it clear to students which learning habits and processes they are using. You try to make every aspect of the learning process as visible as possible through the language you use and through the words and images you display on the walls.

For example: 

Use display to record key learning

Set aside an area of display where students are asked to share any strategies or ‘top tips’ that they have found particularly helpful in their own learning. For those offering the ‘top tip’, it is a distilling activity, but the resulting gallery of ‘top tips’ invites students to adopt the successful strategies of others. This will also support the skills of noticing, collaborating, and distilling.

Organise your classroom in such a way that students are able to select, get and return the resources they need.

2: Dual focus teaching…blending content and process

You design activities that combine the dual objectives of ‘what’ will be learned and ‘how’ it will be learned. You make sure students know that the content they are learning is a way of giving their minds a useful workout. (The content is the vehicle for learning)

For example: 

Encourage self regulation of resources

Design tasks that require the use of a range of resources and gradually expect the students to select what they need.  At the beginning of a session talk with students about the things they might use to help them with their learning.

3: Emotional engagement…Capturing attention

Your lessons are designed to intrigue your students. Students don’t put in the effort unless their energy and attention are captured by what they are doing. You capture your students’ emotional engagement by giving them more of a stake in the process of learning.

For example:

Ideas Factory

William_Heath_Robinson_Inventions_-_Page_057-1

Invite students to work as teams of famous inventors who are going to come up with a new gadget to help other people. It must be useful and commercially viable. Use mindmaps to show the needs of their potential customers and gadgets that could be invented to meet the needs. What materials would they need to make it? Who do they know with the skills to help? Where might they find out relevant information? Success criteria for the task should focus on the way groups have thought about using resources rather than on the finished gadget.

4: Handling uncertainty…Challenge

You have realised from your own life that what is engaging tends to be what is challenging. Since you see education as a preparation for a learning life, you help students to learn how to handle increasing degrees of complexity and uncertainty.

For example:

Scrapheap Challenge

Collect a pile of unrelated objects, or ask students to bring in one object each and mix them in random groupings – e.g. a copper tube, piece of cloth, felt pen, blu-tack. Challenge students to make as many things as they can from the objects, using all of them but nothing else. Discuss examples of particularly imaginative/effective use of materials and whether these ideas can be used in another context.

5: Relationships…Working together

Learning is both a sociable and a solitary activity, and you offer your students opportunities to experience both. You develop interdependent learners who know how to handle themselves in collaborative groups and able to move around in the social space of learning to best effect.

For example:

Changing Habits –from unhelpful to helpful habits

Explore this through role play. Use imaginary characters to create more emotional distance. Discuss peer and family influence on forming habits. How many of our habits do we pick up from those around us? To what extent can we choose our habits?

In pairs, identify habits that could easily be changed (i.e. always eating cornflakes for breakfast), and discuss how this came to be a habit. Decide to change one habit for a set period of time. Discuss what happened. How did the new ‘habit’ feel the first time? How did it feel after 21 times? How could students use this experience to imitate other people’s helpful habits?

6: Reflection and responsibility…Taking charge

You understand that students have to learn how to manage and organise their own learning and that the way to do this is by giving them increasingly demanding opportunities to do so.   You orchestrate students taking charge of their learning by expecting them to plan what they do, distil meaning from it, and revise it accordingly.

For example:

Use learning mats

at the start of this process to prompt the use of and reflection on Resourcing Learning.

A checklist for lesson planning based on these six principles.

Does the lesson plan:

  • Make it clear to students which learning behaviours are being activated?
  • Match and blend the learning behaviour with content?
  • Include a tactic to captivate students’ attention?
  • Have sufficiently challenging learning activities to sustain interest for all?
  • Offer choice on how students could interact on these tasks?
  • Embed aspects of planning, reflecting and revising for content and process?

What do you think?

  • Which of these six principles are a regular feature of your planning?
  • What do you make of principle 2? Is it the most tricky of the six? The following section B is mostly about this aspect of planning.
  • Look at the checklist in the green box above this one: Do your lesson plans capture these six aspects of an effective learning experience?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • Which of the six principles might need to be given greater prominence in your planning.

 

 

Skim read or leave this section if you have met it in other units because… the section applies to any learning behaviour. i.e. not specific to Resourcing Learning/Capitalising.

B.   Big questions to ask about lesson design.

What we teach and how we teach it (the enacted curriculum) are intertwined and offer teachers a lot of freedom. It is here that you can start applying a learning power filter and deploy a unique combination of content and learning tasks.

Open Me

Prelude

In conventional lessons where the teacher remains the focus of attention and the initiator of all activity, and where the epistemic dimension (the conditions for acquiring knowledge) is not acknowledged, students gain habits of compliance and dependence, rather than curiosity and self-reliance.

In developing learning power, teachers are making conscious choices about which habits to introduce and stretch and how best to couple these with content so that lessons become more interesting and challenging. Through such overt coupling of content and specific types of process, students come to know, understand and take control of their learning behaviours – they knowingly use and develop the whole range of learning behaviours.

All lessons function on two levels, they have twin intentions. On the one hand there is content to be acquired, and on the other there are learning behaviours to be exercised in pursuit of this content. The factor that differentiates a standard lesson that effectively ‘delivers the content’ from a learning powered lesson is that the teacher has to think, in advance, about:

  • the learning behaviours that are necessary for successful content acquisition;
  • the design of activities /tasks that will stimulate these behaviours;
  • how learners could reflect on and evaluate their use of these behaviours.

In designing such lessons you have to dare to think differently and flip round your usual lesson design thinking.

  A turn-around in lesson design

Think in two dimensions at once – the content dimension and the learning behaviour dimension. It means turning your thinking around – from teaching to learning.

Or put another way

Think to yourself;

  • what content?
  • using which learning behaviour(s)?
  • via an activity to stretch both?

 

Lesson design questions… one by one

Here the general rules of lesson design have been related to the learning behaviour…Resourcing Learning.

Stage 1. What content do students need to learn?

What content has to be learned? …..Think outcomes.

  • Use standard lesson planning tools:
    • What are students going to be able to do/learn?…think objectives
    • How will they know if they been successful?… think success criteria
  • While keeping an obvious eye on
    • What do they already know?….think previous learning.

 

Stage 2. How will they best learn it?

Using which learning behaviours?

This is the new bit 

Not the usual second step but nonetheless a vital second step where the aim is to weave content acquisition with learning behaviours. The content is the vehicle for exercising the learning behaviours and the learning behaviours accelerate the content acquisition.

Using which learning behaviours?…Think types of learning behaviours

  • Which learning behaviour(s) will help these students get closer to understanding this content?…think learning behaviour charts.
  • Which aspect of, say, Resourcing Learning, lends itself to achieving these outcomes?…think progression columns.
  • How skilled are these students in using this learning behaviour …think progression phases/rows

Say something like this to yourself .…My students need to achieve xxx. At this stage we could get closer to this content by using Resourcing Learning. Most of my students are able to use xxx phase (e.g. respond/blue) Resourcing Learning approaches confidently.

Stage 3. What type of task/activity will stretch the learning?

Which type of task…Think types of task. 

Pick up your thinking from stage 2; 

My students need to achieve xxx. At this stage we could get closer to this content by using Resourcing Learning. Most of my students would be able to use xxx phase (e.g. blue/responds phase) Resourcing Learning approaches confidently.

And now think about the sort of task/activity you might develop/design so as to:

  • orchestrate a problem-solving activity to enable students’ understanding of xyz content without telling them;
  • intrigue them with something that is open to several interpretations;
  • stimulate their curiosity;
  • grab their attention…visually and aurally;
  • allow them to stay stuck before I ask them how they are thinking;
  • offer as a nudge to get them thinking differently that doesn’t give the answer away;
  • leave it as a problem hanging in the air to which we will return later;
  • make links between the challenge, and what and how we are learning in this lesson.

The challenge isn’t about the inherent complexity of the subject matter but about how the content is orchestrated to encourage students to use their learning habits to resource their solution.

Think…what/how much information/content do I need to give/reveal? At what point? In what form? To what end?

Say something like this to yourself .

  • my students need to achieve xxx.
  • at this point we could get closer to this content by using Resourcing Learning.
  • most of my students are able to use xxx phase (e.g. respond/blue phase) Resourcing Learning approaches confidently.
  • What type of task would stretch their Resourcing Learning but assist them with the content…without me just telling them!

 

 

To summarise…the heart of the lesson


It’s the question ‘using which learning behaviours?’ that causes you to think differently about the lesson planning.

  • You ask – as always – what are the anticipated objectives/intentions?
  • The verbs in your resulting objectives will give you clues about the types of task/methodology that will get students there and the sorts of learning behaviours your students will need to contribute to this learning endeavour.

You are designing the task in a way that requires students to contribute their learning ‘powers’ / behaviours. The tasks you design will hook into their learning ‘powers’ and help them to improve them.

Say something like this to yourself:

I am going to think content, learning behaviour and task together:

  • Resourcing Learning will help students to better access the content;
  • The aspect of Resourcing Learning (column) and phase (row) that would fit best is (for example) ‘use a wide range of sources of information which are accessed increasingly independently’ (Resourcing Learning grid, Using Expertise column, Values phase)
  • The type of task/activity that would best stretch both content and learning behaviour, intrigue, challenge, bring people together and give responsibility to students is………
  • Think….what information do I need to reveal/give, in what form, at what point, and what do I want students to do with it?

What do you think?

  • What strikes you about this way of planning with learning behaviours in mind?
  • Where are the potential stumbling blocks?
  • How will you decide which learning behaviour(s) you are going to foreground in your objectives?

Consider a lesson you are about to teach…Little_r

  • What is the content?
  • Which learning behaviour(s), if missing, would make accessing the content very difficult / impossible?
  • How could you blend reference to this learning behaviour(s) into the learning objectives?
  • Can you design a task that will help students to access the content and exercise the key learning behaviour(s) you have identified?

 

 

C. Lesson planning in action – an exemplar, Resourcing Learning focused, task.

How do we design tasks that stretch Resourcing Learning and assist students to approach the content more productively? We cover this in four ways:

  • 1 describes the Think/Puzzle/Explore visible thinking routine;
  • 2 shows the phases of a lesson where Resourcing Learning is the driving behaviour;
  • 3 offers a simple lesson plan template that can be used for any lesson and distils the Resourcing lesson into this format;
  • 4 invites you to extend your thinking about the ways in which we might build learner independence.

 

Open Me

1. A description of the Think, Puzzle, Explore visible thinking routine

This useful VTR is used in Episode 4 of the following lesson, so here as a full description of what it is and how it works.

For more detail on Think/Puzzle/Explore visit the Visible Thinking website:

https://pz.harvard.edu/resources/think-puzzle-explore

Download as a pdf

Think Puzzle Explore – is a routine that sets the stage for deeper inquiry

Three core questions guide students in this routine:

  1. What do you think you know about this topic?
  2. What questions or puzzles do you have?
  3. How can you explore this topic?

Purpose: What kind of thinking does this routine encourage?

The whole routine helps students connect to prior knowledge, stimulates curiosity lays the groundwork for independent inquiry.

Application: When and Where can it be used?

You can use Think/Puzzle/Explore at the beginning of a topic and when you want students to develop their own investigative questions

Launch:  tips for starting and using this routine.

  • Begin by giving students a few quiet moments to consider the topic at hand.
  • Work as a whole class or in small groups and brainstorm ideas in response to:
    • What do you think you know about this topic? Expect misconceptions at this point but include on a list for consideration after further study
    • What questions or puzzles do you have? Expect simple ideas and questions but include in a list and push for thoughts that are truly puzzling or interesting them.
    • How can you explore this topic?
  • Make sure to give adequate time between each question for students to think about and articulate their ideas.

When beginning to use this routine it is sometimes best to do the Think and Puzzle questions together first. In some cases, you may want to have students do this part of the routine individually on paper or in their heads before sharing ideas in a group. Return to the Explore aspect after sharing ideas and puzzles. It may be helpful to a think about what makes an interesting question, or puzzle, and then discuss strategies for exploring selected questions.

Keep a visible record of students’ ideas. If you are working in a group, ask students to share some of their thoughts and collect a broad list of ideas about the artwork or topic on chart paper. Or students can write their individual responses on post-it notes and later add them to a class list of ideas.

2. A lesson with Resourcing Learning to encourage independence.

The lesson below is based around the Aberfan disaster of 1966, but the same principles could be applied to any area of study so long as there are sufficient resources available for independent access by students. The lesson itself starts in a highly structured manner to secure interest and to set the scene for the subsequent independent enquiry.

Overview of lesson plan:

What is happening here?

The lesson exercises a wide variety of learning behaviours in the different Episodes, but in terms of Resourcing Learning and Questioning, it assumes that students have the skills described at the Responds (Blue) and Values (Green) phases of the Resourcing Learning and Questioning grids. Learners already at the Values phase will need little support to access the lesson, whereas Responds phase learners will need more scaffolding and support.

Ask yourself – where are most of my learners on this progression chart? Do they have the necessary Resourcing and Search skills to undertake this lesson?

 

Episode 1 – What might this poem be about?

[This is an Episode with 5 separate phases – see the Powerpoint download and the lesson plan grid for more detail.]

 

Download Poem Here

What is happening here?

A starter activity to intrigue and build interest in further research.

[This is a complex activity to run, and the slide above is only an overview. Download the powerpoint or grid for detail on how to facilitate the 5 different phases of the Episode.]

Download PowerPoint Download the planning grid

The different phases of this Episode stimulate a range of learning behaviours. In Episode 1:

  • Phase 1 – Trying to gain meaning from just one stanza of the poem requires attentive noticing and imagination;
  • Phase 2 – Circulating to find out more provokes distilling, making links, questioning, listening and revising;
  • Phase 3 – Deciding how to tackle the problem involves stopping and planning what to do next;
  • Phase 4 – Putting the stanzas in order requires learners to make links, speculate, explain their thinking and revise their ideas as they go along;
  • Phase 5 – Deciding/Agreeing what the poem might be about requires a blend of reasoning, imagining and negotiation/consensus building;
  • Working as a team of 4 requires a range of collaborative learning behaviours throughout.

This is a rich activity that activates a wide range of learning behaviours as it draws students into the lesson. It aims to be a more engaging introduction than ‘Today we are studying the Aberfan Disaster’

Episode 2 –

What are these 2 boys thinking?

What is happening here?

Having established that the poem relates to a disaster of some kind (they may even have heard something about Aberfan before), this Episode uses some visible thinking routines to explore an image and to ‘Step Inside’ the minds of the 2 boys in the forefront.

For more detail on the Step Inside visible thinking routine:

visit the website

Download as a pdf

Primarily an Empathy related activity that depends on good noticing, the addition of ‘what makes you say that’ and ‘what else might explain . . . ‘ overlays aspects of reasoning and imagining, ‘which one question . . . ‘ adds questioning and distilling, and ‘what does this remind you of’ stimulates link making.

 

Episode 3 – What can you find out about the Aberfan disaster?

What is happening here?

At this stage, you are encouraging students to begin looking for information, almost certainly from the internet. Their research may, at this stage, be relatively superficial and related to finding out some facts/dates/number of casualties etc, but it sets the scene for Episode 4 and for the more focused research that is to follow.

The learning behaviours being activated in this Episode relate to the Questioning grid, and in particular the ‘Search skills’ column. How sophisticated are your learners’ search skills? How much scaffolding will you need to provide?

Episode 4 – Taking Stock, Framing an Enquiry

What is happening here?

Having done some preliminary research on the internet, this Episode uses the Think/Puzzle/Explore visible thinking routine to help students to distil what they have found out, to consider the things that are puzzling them, the questions to which they would like answers, and to begin to think about how they might go about finding this out. It is here that you are setting up the independent enquiry that is to follow.

The ‘Think’ phase encourages students to pool what they have found out, what they think they know already.

The ‘Puzzle’ phase begins to identify potential lines of enquiry.

[It may be worth having a few ‘puzzles’ of your own pre-prepared in case students struggle to identify questions: Was it a natural disaster? Who/what was most responsible? What was the role of Lord Robins? What prevention legislation did it lead to, if any?  What is Aberfan like today? etc. Use only if students are struggling and you have to!]

The ‘Explore’ phase encourages some preliminary thinking about what they will do next and how they will do it.

[NB. How groups might organise themselves to undertake such an enquiry is also explored in section 3c of the Planning module.]

 

Episode 5 – Undertaking independent enquiry

What is happening here?

Having set up the enquiry in Episode 4, here the students, in groups of 4, pursue their own line(s) of enquiry.

Consider:

  • How long will you give them – it needs to be a significant amount of time if they are to dig beyond the superficial.
  • How you will maintain momentum – will you need mini review points to check/monitor progress?
  • How you will help them to assess reliability / possible bias in what they are discovering.
  • How they will report/share the outcomes of their enquiry so that others may share their insights – will it be a report, a presentation to other groups, a ‘jigsaw’ activity where groups are reconfigured, or something else?
  • To what extent you are able/prepared to allow students to decide these things for themselves. The more they can decide for themselves, the greater the levels of independence and interdependence.

 

What do you think?

  • Can you think of something from your own curriculum that could be treated in this, or a similar, way?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • Which class you might try this with.

3 Using a lesson plan template to distil this lesson.

Given that there are hundreds of lesson plan formats we will use a few different types of planning tools over the course of these units. This one is a simple streamlined useable tool that includes:

  • What you do (teacher action);
  • What students do (student action);
  • What the learning behaviours being called upon are (learning behaviours);
  • What you say (learning talk) to nudge the learning behaviour along.

The format is divided into episodes to show the change of purpose, action and use of learning behaviour across the course of the lesson.

Download a blank lesson plan as a MS Word document:

If we populate the template with the episodes explored in section 2 above, we get the completed lesson plan . . .

Download the planning grid

What do you think?

  • What are your first reactions to this lesson plan template?
  • Does planning for four aspects – teacher action, student action, learning behaviours, teacher talk – seem useful?
  • How does sequencing the lesson as ‘episodes’ help or hinder planning?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • The extent to which your existing planning template enables you to think about lessons in this way.
  • What you would like / need to add to it.

 

4 Extend your thinking about stimulating independent enquiry.

We all would like learners to become increasingly independent as they move through their schooling. Many schools embed such a commitment into their mission statement, in the recognition that lifelong learning necessarily requires learners to be able to control and direct their own learning.

But . . .

It is an uncomfortable truth that, despite our best intentions, research suggests that the longer students stay in school the more, not less, dependent they become on their teachers. 

Many schools tell us that the biggest problem is that seemingly successful yet dependent learners at key stage 4 are unable to make the shift towards independent study post 16. A significant number of Ofsted reports cite lack of learner independence as one of the reasons that a school is not yet outstanding. It appears that, left to chance, independence often fails to flourish, sacrificed perhaps on the altar of meeting targets, passing exams, delivering an increasingly overloaded curriculum.

King’s School, Macclesfield, bucks the trend – there is a planned programme of increasingly independent study units running through Key Stages 3, 4 and 5. Time is given to these activities, successes are celebrated, and students talk with enthusiasm about the impact on their ability to explore and study areas of personal interest. Could the same be said of your school? Your classroom?

 

Ask yourself

  • Do learners gain in independence as they move through the school?
  • Why/how does this happen?
  • Are opportunities for growing independence built into curriculum plans, or is it left to chance?
  • How does my classroom contribute to growing independent learners?
  • How could my classroom contribute to growing independent learners?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • One thing you will do differently in order to nurture learner independence

Continue Reading

Section 2: Building Resourcing Learning friendly classroom cultures

Teachers as habit formers

As teachers we are in the habit-forming business. What we say, what we display on classroom walls, what we celebrate, praise or dismiss, what we model or how we design learning activities will all influence the ways in which students learn, perform and behave. Classroom cultures have a huge influence on students’ learning as you will remember from Playing the Learning Power Game.

Creating a Resourcing-friendly classroom culture

As a result of section 1 of this module . . .

You have learned about Resourcing and how it grows. You have met the resourcing progression chart (opposite) and considered the skills that your students have already mastered and those that might need some further attention.

This section offers a catalogue of teaching ideas, organised in relation to the phases of development in the progression chart, that you can use to sharpen your students’ resourcing skills.

But before you dip into the catalogue, let’s take a moment to consider whether your existing classroom culture is sufficiently resourcing-friendly to allow students’ resourcing skills to flourish and develop.

 

Is your classroom culture ready for Resourcing?

Let’s go back to a diagram you may have met in the latter stages of Phase 1 Playing the Learning Power Game.

It is a reminder of what a resourcing-friendly classroom culture looks like in terms of the 4 aspects of classroom culture (Relating, Talking, Constructing, Celebrating).

A resourcing-friendly classroom culture

Here is a selection of features that might begin to shape the emotional climate of your classroom to encourage resourcing.

The diagram has 4 sections:

  • Top – strategies you could build into the way you teach to stimulate resourcing;
  • Right – indications of the sort of language you might use to stimulate resourcing;
  • Bottom – ways in which you might celebrate / praise students’ use of resourcing;
  • Left – things that you need to enable students to do.

Take time to download the diagram and consider which of these aspects are already a regular feature in your classroom, and which could easily be introduced to make the culture even more resourcing-friendly.

Blending these ideas

Ask yourself:

How might you harness some or more of the ideas in the resourcing-friendly culture diagram . . .

 

 

 

to ready your classroom for building your students’ resourcing skills

As you begin to explore the teaching ideas for each phase of development, keep these big 4 ideas in mind. Ask yourself – how might you:

  1. Slow the pace of lessons to ensure there is enough time for students to capitalise for themselves;

  2. Enable and encourage talk about resourcing to ensure students understand the how and why of resourcing;

  3. Design activities that exercise and develop students’ resourcing skills, and ensure they reflect on how it is developing;

  4. Display, praise and reward the use and growth of resourcing.

 

And if you do embed these 4 big ideas . . .

A quick look back to progression in classroom culture.

You have met this diagram in various formats during Phase 1, Playing the Learning Power Game. It charts progression in the 4 aspects of classroom culture (Relating, Talking, Constructing and Celebrating) from a teacher-focused classroom culture at the bottom to a fully-fledged learning-focused culture at the top.

If you are able to keep these 4 big ideas above in mind and embed them in your classroom culture, you will see that your classroom culture is around the fourth row, well on the way to being learning-friendly.

Now take a look at the Learning Chart sections where you will find plenty of ideas to try.

Continue Reading

Section 1: Resourcing Learning and how it develops

1a) What do we mean by Resourcing Learning?

In the early BLP framework, it is called capitalising. It’s about being on the lookout for  strategies, materials, resources and forms of support in the environment that can help you in your current learning or problem-solving. Traditional schooling assumes that intelligence is all in the head. But recent studies show that it is much fairer and more accurate to see good learners as people who are ready and able to make intelligent use of all kinds of strategies and things around them—floor space, filing cabinets, dictionaries, notebooks, personal organisers, telephones, libraries, e-mail; and, of course, other people.

1b) What does being a good Resource Learner involve?

Being a good resource learner involves learning with the help of many different sources –other people, books, the internet, music, the environment, experience…and making intelligent use of all kinds of strategies and things to aid learning. In the early stages, it means selecting and making the best use of known strategies and classroom resources but this swiftly moves on to embracing a much wider and varied range of possibilities. This involves being able to seek novel ways of solving problems by exploiting the potential of known strategies and what is around them including things you may never have thought of as a resource. Importantly it includes being able to adapt and adopt the ways other people do things; taking their habits and values into your own repertoire (imitating). Gradually students can improve their physical skills, absorb ideas and thinking patterns by observing the approach and detail of how others do things. When looked at from these diverse angles, growing resourcing moves well beyond encouraging a student to ‘read pages 24 and 25’.The Resourcing Learning grid below takes account of the constituent parts of building the habit of Resourcing Learning

Our progression grid for Resourcing Learning has 5 components:

1c) Unpicking the columns; what contributes to a readiness to Resource Learning?

The grid columns are things that might combine to make up the skills and attitudes of a learner who uses resources effectively

Overview of the grid

The grid for resourcing learning covers how pupils might progress in the skill and habit selecting and using strategies and resources to help their learning. It covers how pupils grow in the selection of tools for learning, moving from a scatter gun approach to being able to select the best strategy / tool for the job. Using expertise from books or the internet and moving gradually to using original sources of expertise. Imitating others is covered in a column of its own showing how pupils might start with watching others for clues and moving towards selectively using others’ ideas to guide their own lives. But one column is devoted to being aware of whether it is needed at all to guard against the danger of resources turning into a prop which the pupil relies on too heavily

Take a closer look at what each column of the grid is about

Self-talk

The voice of self-awareness

Self-talk is what we say to ourselves as we learn. The statements capture what someone in each phase of the grid might be thinking. Students may use some of these phrases when talking with you, or in writing from time to time, but mostly self-talk goes on inside their heads. We have shown a small flavour of self-talk thoughts that teachers can encourage students to imitate. Some relate to setting about learning, others to talking through which learning methods or resources might be useful, and others to monitoring and evaluating the learning being used. All such self-talk is important in building a Resourcing Learning habit.

Selecting and using strategies and tools for learning

How we build expertise in finding and selecting strategies and resources

The first contributory factor in Resourcing Learning is about how students move from relying on others to provide strategies and tools to help them learn to being able to choose from a selection and on to being able to find their own strategies and tools and finally to use familiar strategies and resources imaginatively to broaden their effect.

Using expertise

How we broaden our use of sources of expertise

The second contributory factor in Resourcing Learning is about our use of expertise. Our first understanding of expertise may lie with people we know; we ask for information about what and why etc. But we move on to realising that there are other sources of expertise to be found in books and on the internet for example. This broad range of expertise must be used with care and discernment and moves on into more specific and complex realms. There’s a real skill to finding and being able to use high-level expertise. From this effective use of expertise we might become expert ourselves and share our understanding with others.

When to use resources

Distinguishing between resources and props

This column has been included as a bit of a caution. It’s about students being able to recognise when a resource is needed and when they could indeed work something out for themselves. There are times when learning resources become learning props; when students come to rely on them and can’t move on without them. Of course, this doesn’t happen with every subject but there comes a time when the contents of learning walls and visual prompts have to become part of a student’s understanding. Eventually, a person’s own expertise enables them to learn well from themselves.

Imitating others

Our inclination and ability to learn from others

We are all hard-wired to learn by imitating others. This is something that can be used wisely or inappropriately. In this column we explore how this moves from being unaware of how other people do things to using people’s ideas and values to help guide our own lives. The important ideas going up the column are; watching and listening; ‘magpieing’ but with little selection; selecting and combining; changing and adapting (innovating). So this is not straight copying, it’s about being stimulated by using others’ ideas but making them fully your own. It’s a valuable trait that can be transformed into an essential skill/habit.

What do you think?

  • What have you learned about Resourcing Learning from these descriptions?
  • What have you had confirmed?
  • What surprised you?
  • How have your views changed?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • Any ideas for practical classroom experiments that these descriptions have triggered
  • Which column your students are most secure in.

1d) Unpicking the rows; getting better at Resourcing Learning.

Of course, the development of Resource Learning doesn’t grow neatly up each column or evenly across the phases in the grid. The five broad phases of dispositional growth (purple – orange) are affective ways in which people may be inclined to behave: we call this inclination ‘mindedness’.

Here is our interpretation of how Resource Learning might grow.

Meaning behind the phases

The phases are drawn from Bloom’s taxonomy of the affective domain.

Phase ‘Receives’ (purple) is about doing something because you are told or expected to.

Phase ‘Responds’ (blue) is about gaining interest and doing things more willingly.

Phase ‘Values’ (green) is a key phase since the student now sees the value of behaving in this way. It’s a win for them; to behave like this is in their interest. It’s in this phase that the behaviour becomes more secure.

Phase ‘Organises’ (yellow) is the phase in which the student capitalises on this ‘in their interest’ behaviour and gets themselves organised to use it positively.

Phase ‘Embodies’ (orange), known as ‘characterised’ in the original taxonomy. In this phase, the student has made this behaviour their own. It has become part of their character; they can’t not do it and they have become highly skilled in doing it.

We urge you to see this progression as long term. Some phases will take years for people to work through; some will never be worked through. None of the phases are inevitable. There is a lifetime of development captured here. Nevertheless, the role of a teacher or parent should surely be to encourage and enable this journey.

Lacks: Minded to ‘just do things’

 

In this ‘Lacks’ (grey) phase, students are not really aware of using strategies or resources for learning. They will use strategies and things that are around but don’t view them as something that helps them to learn.  The concept of a resource for learning or a learning strategy is not yet formed.

Receives: Minded to use resources they are given and the strategies they are told to use

 

In the Receives (purple) phase, students begin to use the things and strategies they are given to help with their learning. The concept of resourcing learning is beginning to form. They become aware that it might be useful to watch and listen to others and that this can be useful in their own learning. They see their teachers as a source of expertise and can become too dependent on this unless supported to broaden their range of strategies and resources.

Responds: Minded to use a wider range of strategies and resources.

 

In the Responds (blue) phase, students have become aware of many classroom strategies and resources although have yet to learn to select them carefully for a specific need. They now begin to use other sources of expertise such as books or the internet but again their approach lacks precision.

Values: Minded to broaden the range of Learning Strategies and Resources.

 

In the Values (green) phase, students are fully aware of the purpose and usefulness of different strategies and resources. Here they become more skilled in selecting the right one for the job in hand. They become more skilled in using expertise and they know when they need other strategies or resources to help them further. Importantly they now select ideas or behaviours from others and combine these with their own to make/achieve new understandings.

Organises: Minded to deepen their use of Learning Strategies and Resources.

 

In the Organises (yellow) phase, Resourcing Learning has become a skilful habit. Now students are able to select the best strategy or tool for the job, delve deeply into pertinent sources of expertise and know when they can work things out for themselves. When imitating others they can adapt others’ ideas in an innovative way thus making a unique result.

Embodies: Minded to exploit learning strategies and resources to the full.

 

In the Embodies (orange) phase, people have become expert at finding and using appropriate strategies and resources. They can use a wide range with real expertise and can use these imaginatively to bring about different results. They now use original sources in search of validation of their ideas or to form new knowledge. They have acquired enough skill, knowledge or expertise to become an expert themselves, and their drive for expertise may be inspired by the vision, values and ideas of significant others.

What do you think?

  • What has struck you about the act of Resource Learning having read the descriptions above?
  • Which phase do you operate in?
  • What makes you say that?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • What you might do to assist your students to make headway in their Resource Learning behaviour.
  • Any practical ideas the text has triggered.

Preparation for the Learning Team meeting

Where are my students now?

  • Take a look at the Resourcing Learning progression chart in your Learning Diary or
  • Download grid to colour in here
  • Colour in the cells where you think your students are secure.
  • Some will barely be on the chart while others may be quite a way up. Neat straight lines of secure behaviours are rare. But looking at your students in this way should give you an idea of what you need to work on.
  • Draw a red line across the chart to denote where you think most of the school’s students could and should reach by the time they leave.
  • Please take the results of these tasks with you to the Professional Learning Team session shown in Section 4
Continue Reading

Section 4: Team reflection and planning

Session agenda

1. Session objectives

What do we want to achieve? (5 mins)

2. Sharing classroom experiments

How did our experiments go? (20 mins)

Share

  • the changes in practice you tried
  • the changes in classroom culture you were hoping to achieve
  • how students reacted
  • what you learned
  • what next as a result

Probe

  • what was getting in the way?
  • what seemed difficult?
  • what would make it easier?
  • what made it work particularly well?
  • why it was successful?
  • changes in your behaviour

Talk about impact

  • improvements in students’ behaviour
  • more/renewed interest in the subject
  • more harmony in the classroom
  • greater willingness to try, and try different ways
  • Avoidance of…..
  • Improvements in……
  • Increases in…….
  • Little of no changes in…

3. Recapping on-line materials.

What did we think of the materials? ( 15 mins)

Reactions to

  • The Reasoning progression grid
  • Where students are secure
  • Where students could be secure when they leave our school
  • Classroom culture ideas
  • Activities and talk ideas

4. Planning what to do.

What do we need to do next? ( 10 mins )

Decide

  • Which ideas should we all adopt as a school strategy?
  • How the progression of Reasoning should be built across the school. ie how the phases of Reasoning might play out against key stages and even year groups.

5. Personal action planning.

What am I going to do? ( 20 mins )

5a. Consider

  •  how you want your pupils to improve/develop/enhance their approach to Reasoning?
  •  what are you going to do to bring this about?
  • How you want to consolidate/develop your classroom culture for reasoning?
  • What you are going to do to bring this about?
  • develop your enquiry question.

Think of it like this…

If I do  XXXX will it improve/develop/enhance YYYY

This is the crunch question. Your pupils are unlikely to change unless you change!

Capture your learning enquiry as a question

Developing-an-enquiry-question-Reasoning

Developing-an-enquiry-question-Reasoning.pdf

5b. Put a short enquiry plan together

Personal Action Plan-Reasoning

Personal-Action-Plan-Reasoning.pdf

5c. Discuss which of these possible impacts on students have been observed;

Purple (Show me. Tell me)

  • improved ability to describe/explain what they are thinking
  • greater inclination to think before taking action
  • willingness to undertake problem solving activities
  • sometimes able to explain why they did something

Blue (I’ll try)

  • increased willingness to explain why they think something
  • inclination to support their answers with evidence
  • improvement in spotting patterns or visualising how things could be
  • increased preparedness to work methodically

Green (I see why)

  • willingness to construct well-honed arguments
  • improved ability to justify what they believe
  • more inclined to want reasons or proof
  • looks for evidence to support their thinking

Yellow (I’ll make sure I do)

  • increased tendency to look for flaws in an argument
  • wants to avoid unwarranted certainty
  • increasingly uses ‘if – then’ kinds of reasoning

6. Evaluate team session

How did we do as a team? ( 5 mins )

  • Did we achieve our objectives?
  • Are we comfortable with what we are trying to achieve?
  • Any concerns at this point?
  • Next meeting date and time.
Continue Reading

Section 3: Blending Reasoning with content

So far, you have:

  • Looked at your students through the lens of the Reasoning learning chart
  • Gained a sense of what becoming better at Reasoning looks like
  • Explored a range of ideas and activities that will help to engage students with Reasoning

Now we look closely at how to blend improving students’ reasoning into the content you have to teach.

A. The principles behind any learning powered lesson

B. Big questions to ask about lesson design

C. Lesson planning in action…an exemplar reasoning focused task

Learning habits form through use and practice, but desirable habits survive and flourish better if students are aware of them, realise their value and strive to improve them. The curriculum through its lessons provides the rich and varied occasions for exercising learning habits.

A. The principles behind any learning powered lesson

Think of yourself as a learning power coach, helping your students to help themselves to develop their learning habits. Hence your lessons are much more likely to contain challenges and activities that get your students thinking and learning for themselves. You encourage students to explore challenging questions, problems or assertions and become observers of their own learning. You step back from telling and heavy scaffolding and instead try to mobilise your students’ learning behaviours. You are organising learning to let them take the strain.

Open Me

The SIX principles that lie behind teaching for learning power

1: Visible learning…Surfacing learning

You make it clear to students which learning habits and processes they are using. You try to make every aspect of the learning process as visible as possible through the language you use and through the words and images you display on the walls.

For example: 

Use displays of reasoning behaviours such as:

 If – Then suggestions:

If I believe that I have proved something, then I will go back over it to check that I have not made any errors or false assumptions.

If I feel certain about an issue, then I will check for any counter evidence.

Or useful reminders such as:

2: Dual focus teaching…blending content and process

You design activities that combine the dual objectives of ‘what’ will be learned and ‘how’ it will be learned. You make sure students know that the content they are learning is a way of giving their minds a useful workout. (The content is the vehicle for learning)

For example: 

A simple, straightforward way of showing the purpose of learning objectives or goals…simply add SO THAT at the end of the objective. The SO THAT is similar to the why. It aims to offer a wider reason for pursuing the learning objective. So an objective becomes…

Be able to xxxxxxx So That. . . . add the wider purpose

Continue to put the ‘how’ before the ‘what’ in constructing objectives or intentions.

As a team, using xxx reasoning (the how) be able to….(the what.)…. so that…(the relevance)……

3: Emotional engagement…Capturing attention

Your lessons are designed to intrigue your students. Students don’t put in the effort unless their energy and attention are captured by what they are doing. You capture your students’ emotional engagement by giving them more of a stake in the process of learning.

For example:

  • Quick learning challenges to warm up/ tune-in to relevant  learning muscles
  • Challenge: “ There are nine little pigs in a field.
    • By drawing two squares how can you give each pig its own pen?”
    • 5 minutes to complete

Use Coaching Questions with “could be” or “might be” language. “How differently can we draw the squares?” “Can we draw squares outside the box?”

Piggies in a Field

Download coaching notes Download the learning challenge

4: Handling uncertainty…Challenge

You have realised from your own life that what is engaging tends to be what is challenging. Since you see education as a preparation for a learning life, you help students to learn how to handle increasing degrees of complexity and uncertainty.

For example:

Spot the mistake.

Offer students examples of written work with different numbers of mistakes in them. Challenge them to work in pairs to correctly identify the mistakes in each example. When complete tell pairs if they have found the right number of mistakes but if not don’t discuss which, if any, they have overlooked. Ask for explanations of the errors and how they can be avoided.

5: Relationships…Working together

Learning is both a sociable and a solitary activity, and you offer your students opportunities to experience both. You develop interdependent learners who know how to handle themselves in collaborative groups and able to move around in the social space of learning to best effect.

For example:

Sorting how decisions are made.

What could groups do when they can’t agree on the logic of the situation? Try this three stage approach to reaching a consensus.

Once a range of alternative ideas/strategies have been identified:

Stage 1 –  a few minutes whole group discussion. If one idea emerges as everyone’s favourite, then a consensus has been reached. If no single idea has everyone’s support, move to stage 2

Stage 2 – Now, try for a compromise involving some ‘give and take’. Look at two or three of the most popular ideas, and encourage students to ask:

  • What changes are needed for one of these ideas to be acceptable to everyone?, or failing that . .
  • Which one would we all be willing to try, for a short time, to see how it works out. Then back to stage 1. Decide: pursue/ change tack. If there is still no agreement. . . .

Stage 3 – the last resort – voting. Show of hands, or a secret vote. Or:

  • Label the different possibilities A/B/C/D etc
  • Each person nominates their top three
  • Tally scores and the idea with the greatest number of ‘hits’ is the group’s preferred solution.

6: Reflection and responsibility…Taking charge

You understand that students have to learn how to manage and organise their own learning and that the way to do this is by giving them increasingly demanding opportunities to do so.   You orchestrate students taking charge of their learning by expecting them to plan what they do, distil meaning from it, and revise it accordingly.

For example:

Use learning mats

at the start of this process to prompt the use of and reflection on reasoning.

Download

A checklist for lesson planning based on these six principles.

Does the lesson plan:

  • Make it clear to students which learning behaviours are being activated?
  • Match and blend the learning behaviour with content?
  • Include a tactic to captivate students’ attention?
  • Have sufficiently challenging learning activities to sustain interest for all?
  • Offer choice on how students could interact on these tasks?
  • Embed aspects of planning, reflecting and revising for content and process?

What do you think?

  • Which of these six principles are a regular feature of your planning?
  • What do you make of principle 2? Is it the most tricky of the six? The following section B is mostly about this aspect of planning.
  • Look at the checklist in the green box above this one: Do your lesson plans capture these six aspects of an effective learning experience?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • Which of the six principles might need to be given greater prominence in your planning.

 

 

B.   Big questions to ask about lesson design.

Skim read or leave this section if you have met it in other units because… the section applies to any learning behaviour. i.e. not specific to Reasoning.

What we teach and how we teach it (the enacted curriculum) are intertwined and offer teachers a lot of freedom. It is here that you can start applying a learning power filter and deploy a unique combination of content and learning tasks.

Open Me

Prelude

In conventional lessons where the teacher remains the focus of attention and the initiator of all activity, and where the epistemic dimension (the conditions for acquiring knowledge) is not acknowledged, students gain habits of compliance and dependence, rather than curiosity and self-reliance.

In developing learning power, teachers are making conscious choices about which habits to introduce and stretch and how best to couple these with content so that lessons become more interesting and challenging. Through such overt coupling of content and specific types of process, students come to know, understand and take control of their learning behaviours – they knowingly use and develop the whole range of learning behaviours.

All lessons function on two levels, they have twin intentions. On the one hand there is content to be acquired, and on the other there are learning behaviours to be exercised in pursuit of this content. The factor that differentiates a standard lesson that effectively ‘delivers the content’ from a learning powered lesson is that the teacher has to think, in advance, about:

  • the learning behaviours that are necessary for successful content acquisition;
  • the design of activities /tasks that will stimulate these behaviours;
  • how learners could reflect on and evaluate their use of these behaviours.

In designing such lessons you have to dare to think differently and flip round your usual lesson design thinking.

  A turn-around in lesson design

Think in two dimensions at once – the content dimension and the learning behaviour dimension. It means turning your thinking around – from teaching to learning.

Or put another way

Think to yourself;

  • what content?
  • using which learning behaviour(s)?
  • via an activity to stretch both?

 

Lesson design questions… one by one

Here the general rules of lesson design have been related to the learning behaviour…reasoning.

Stage 1. What content do students need to learn?

What content has to be learned? …..Think outcomes.

  • Use standard lesson planning tools:
    • What are students going to be able to do/learn?…think objectives
    • How will they know if they been successful?… think success criteria
  • While keeping an obvious eye on
    • What do they already know?….think previous learning.

 

Stage 2. How will they best learn it?

Using which learning behaviours?

This is the new bit 

Not the usual second step but nonetheless a vital second step where the aim is to weave content acquisition with learning behaviours. The content is the vehicle for exercising the learning behaviours and the learning behaviours accelerate the content acquisition.

Using which learning behaviours?…Think types of learning behaviours

  • Which learning behaviour(s) will help these students get closer to understanding this content?…think learning behaviour charts.
  • Which aspect of, say, reasoning, lends itself to achieving these outcomes?…think progression columns.
  • How skilled are these students in using this learning behaviour …think progression phases/rows

Say something like this to yourself .…My students need to achieve xxx. At this stage we could get closer to this content by using reasoning. Most of my students are able to use xxx phase (e.g. respond/blue) reasoning approaches confidently.

Stage 3. What type of task/activity will stretch the learning?

Which type of task…Think types of task. 

Pick up your thinking from stage 2; 

My students need to achieve xxx. At this stage we could get closer to this content by using reasoning. Most of my students would be able to use xxx phase (e.g. blue/responds phase) reasoning approaches confidently.

And now think about the sort of task/activity you might develop/design so as to:

  • orchestrate a problem-solving activity to enable students’ understanding of xyz content without telling them;
  • intrigue them with something that is open to several interpretations;
  • stimulate their curiosity;
  • grab their attention…visually and aurally;
  • allow them to stay stuck before I ask them how they are thinking;
  • offer as a nudge to get them thinking differently that doesn’t give the answer away;
  • leave it as a problem hanging in the air to which we will return later;
  • make links between the challenge, and what and how we are learning in this lesson.

The challenge isn’t about the inherent complexity of the subject matter but about how the content is orchestrated to encourage students to use their learning habits to resource their solution.

Think…what/how much information/content do I need to give/reveal? At what point? In what form? To what end?

Say something like this to yourself .

  • my students need to achieve xxx.
  • at this point we could get closer to this content by using reasoning.
  • most of my students are able to use xxx phase (e.g. respond/blue phase) reasoning approaches confidently.
  • What type of task would stretch their reasoning and assist them with the content…without me just telling them!

 

To summarise…the heart of the lesson


It’s the question ‘using which learning behaviours?’ that causes you to think differently about the lesson planning.

  • You ask – as always – what are the anticipated objectives/intentions?
  • The verbs in your resulting objectives will give you clues about the types of task/methodology that will get students there and the sorts of learning behaviours your students will need to contribute to this learning endeavour.

You are designing the task in a way that requires students to contribute their learning ‘powers’ / behaviours. The tasks you design will hook into their learning ‘powers’ and help them to improve them.

Say something like this to yourself:

I am going to think content, learning behaviour and task together:

  • Reasoning will help students to better access the content;
  • The aspect of reasoning (column) and phase (row) that would fit best is (for example) “reduce uncertainty using justifiable evidence” (Frames of Mind column, Green phase).
  • The type of task/activity that would best stretch both content and learning behaviour, intrigue, challenge, bring people together and give responsibility to students is………
  • Think….what information do I need to reveal/give, in what form, at what point, and what do I want students to do with it?

What do you think?

  • What strikes you about this way of planning with learning behaviours in mind?
  • Where are the potential stumbling blocks?
  • How will you decide which learning behaviour(s) you are going to foreground in your objectives?

Consider a lesson you are about to teach…Little_r

  • What is the content?
  • Which learning behaviour(s), if missing, would make accessing the content very difficult / impossible?
  • How could you blend reference to this learning behaviour(s) into the learning objectives?
  • Can you design a task that will help students to access the content and exercise the key learning behaviour(s) you have identified?

 

 

C. Lesson planning in action – an exemplar, reasoning focused, task.

How do we design tasks that stretch Reasoning and assist students to approach the content more productively? We cover this in four ways:

  1. A description of the phases of a lesson designed to explore a type of reasoning

  2. The lesson plan shown as a simple grid  

 

Open Me

1. A description of the phases of a lesson designed to explore a type of reasoning.

Look through the lesson below. It uses spot the difference to encourage students to speculate based on limited information, using inferential reasoning to analyse evidence and counter evidence.

The lesson focuses on the Frames of Mind and the Applying Reasoning columns of the Reasoning chart, mostly at the blue through yellow phases. It creates a situation in which students have to do the best they can with a range of inconclusive and sometimes contradictory evidence.

Notice how, despite the focus on learners amending their ideas as the evidence is found, other learning behaviours ‘bubble up’ as the lesson proceeds. It reminds us that given effective support learning behaviours don’t function in isolation, that learners not only have a wide range of learning behaviours to call on but that they can move seamlessly from one to another as required.

Firstly, an overview of the lesson:

 

Using inferential reasoning to analyse evidence and counter evidence

Episode 1 – What time of day is this?

What is going on here?

At this stage, students can see only one of the 2 images.

The question ‘What time of day is this?’ encourages students to hypothesise based on precious little evidence.

About the only thing we know for certain is that it is not at night. Beyond that, it is educated guesswork.

Clues that might yield some insight:

  • people;
  • clothing;
  • the woman’s watch;
  • light and shadow;
  • the white shopping bag;
  • others?

The important thing here is that students try to support their view with evidence of some kind, however flimsy.

Use the visible thinking routine ‘what makes you say that?’ to encourage explanation and justification.

Vary it with:

  • Can you give me a bit more on why you think that?
  • Convince me;
  • How can you be sure?

[Hints:

The woman on the right has a white bag tucked behind her. Has she been shopping? If yes, then it must be late enough for her to have already been to the shops.

Try as you might, the dial on her watch is not visible.

The light appears bright – does that suggest towards the middle of the day?

The atmosphere is fairly relaxed – is this lunchtime, or thereabouts ?]

Episode 2 – Spot the differences:

What is going on here?

They now see both images, side by side.

Be careful not to hint at the time difference – simply say that the 2 pictures are of the same scene, taken at different times.

Episode 2 is a noticing activity, looking to identify similarity and, more importantly, subtle/obscure differences.

Conduct as a Think / Pair / Share activity on tables.

Gallery students’ differences and similarities.

[Hints:

If students need help, get them to focus on the 2 central characters, the people in the background, where the sunlight and shadows are.]

 

Episode 3 – Which photo was taken first?:

What is going on here?

Begin by exploring which of the differences and similarities identified in Episode 2 might be important, and which might not be relevant.

As with Episode 1, the evidence is again inconclusive, but this time totally so. Lengthening shadows from one image to the next might tell you something – but only if we know it is afternoon. Otherwise they could be the shortening shadows of the morning.

There is simply too little evidence here to justify a conclusive answer. Even an educated guess is little more than a guess.

The key point here is not to answer the question ‘Which photo was taken first?’, but to help students to realise that reasoning without evidence to back it up is nothing more than a personal opinion.

However there is one thing that we do know for certain – that the differences identified in Episode 2 must mean that the 2 photos were not taken at the same time. Which leads into Episode 4. . .

[Hints:

We can find no evidence that either image precedes the other. Let us know if you spot something that we have missed!]

Episode 4 – What time elapsed between these two images?:

What is going on here?

More like Episode 1 than Episode 3, this time there is evidence that students can use.

Begin by going back to the gallery of differences and similarities – are the ones that appeared important in relation to deciding which photo was taken first also the ones that are important in deciding on the elapsed time? You are leading them to see that evidence needs to be relevant to the question being asked.

What they can be certain of is that sufficient time must have elapsed for all of the differences to have occurred. The differences suggest a longer elapsed time. Conversely, all of the similarities (ie the things that have not changed) are counter evidence suggesting a shorter elapsed time. Here students have to balance evidence and counter evidence to come to a hypothesis that is supported by all of the ‘facts’.

If students need help, nudge them consider the implications of:

  • The rearranged shopping bag behind the woman on the right;
  • The (dis)appearance of the man in the red shirt (top left);
  • The continued presence of the man in the white shirt (over left shoulder of woman on the right);
  • The sunlight striking the flowers middle left.

Use the visible thinking routine Point / Evidence / Explain to help students to structure their arguments (See section 2, Purple to Blue)

[Hints:

The differences need to have sufficient time to happen – all of the background people need time to change positions / appear / disappear; the woman to the right needs time to rearrange the white bag behind her (does she show her friend what she has bought, and then put the bag back behind her?); critically, the light falling on the flowers to the left of the women has changed, and the flowers in full sunlight have changed – this is the key piece of evidence that confirms an elapsed time of more than a minute or two.]

Episode 5 – Agreeing within what time window these two images were taken

What is going on here?

Given that students were unable to give a definitive answer in Episode 4 because of lack of firm evidence, they are now encouraged to consider all of the available evidence to decide on the most probable minimum and maximum times within which the two images were taken.

The argument will centre on which difference probably took longest to happen – could it be that the woman on the right has done something with the bag behind herself? Did she open it to show her friend what she had bought? Or it could be combination of events all of which are unlikely to have happened simultaneously?

It will also have to take into account the similarities that are least likely to be sustained – the women are unlikely to sit there for an hour and the guy in the white shirt also sit in the same place for an hour.

Students are being encouraged to do the best they can with all of the circumstantial evidence available to come up with their best guess.

The message here is that even when we have to make a guess, we can at least make a guess that is both plausible and consistent with the available evidence.

[Hints:

The two key things to balance are a) the shifting sunlight and b) those things that have not changed. The time window has to be large enough for the shift in sunlight to have occurred, and yet short enough for the women and the guy in the white shirt to have remained in almost identical positions.

So what would your answer be? A minimum of 30 minutes for the sun to shift position, and a maximum of an hour for the 2 women and the man to not move?

Can you do any better – on the available evidence?]

Episode 6 – Distilling what has been learned about Reasoning

What is going on here?

Time to reflect on the activity and to tease out the key learning points.

These might include:

  • Opinions need to be backed by evidence;
  • Sometimes the evidence is inconclusive;
  • It takes time to gather the necessary evidence;
  • We need to be logical in order to convince others;
  • We have to careful when we make assumptions;
  • We cannot prove everything;

[PS – If you are hoping that at some point we are going to give the correct answers, dream on ! We don’t know either!!]

2. The lesson plan shown as a simple grid 

This simple streamlined useable grid captures the lesson just shown above and includes:

  • What you do (teacher action)
  • What students do (student action)
  • The types of learning behaviours being called upon
  • What you say (learning talk) to nudge the learning behaviour along.

The format is divided into episodes to show the change of purpose, action and use of learning behaviour across the course of the lesson.

Here is the grid lesson template for the reasoning lesson shown and analysed above:

Download

Download a blank lesson plan as a MS Word document: Lesson Planning Grid [.DOC 33KB]

What do you think?

  • What are your first reactions to this lesson?
  • The lesson activates high level reasoning skills – Which phase of Reasoning best represents the skills needed for success?
  • Does the fact that there is no definitive ‘answer’ detract from or enhance the activity?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • A class that you teach with sufficiently high levels of reasoning skills to access this lesson.

 

Continue Reading

Section 2: Building Reasoning-friendly classroom cultures

Teachers as habit formers

As teachers we are in the habit-forming business. What we say, what we display on classroom walls, what we celebrate, praise or dismiss, what we model or how we design learning activities will all influence the ways in which students learn, perform and behave. Classroom cultures have a huge influence on students’ learning as you will remember from Playing the Learning Power Game.

Creating a Reasoning-friendly classroom culture

As a result of section 1 of this module . . .

You have learned about Reasoning and how it grows. You have met the reasoning progression chart (opposite) and considered the skills that your students have already mastered and those that might need some further attention.

This section offers a catalogue of teaching ideas, organised in relation to the phases of development in the progression chart, that you can use to sharpen your students’ reasoning skills.

But before you dip into the catalogue, let’s take a moment to consider whether your existing classroom culture is sufficiently reasoning-friendly to allow students’ reasoning skills to flourish and develop.

 

Is your classroom culture ready for Reasoning?

Let’s go back to a diagram you may have met in the latter stages of Phase 1 Playing the Learning Power Game.

It is a reminder of what a reasoning-friendly classroom culture looks like in terms of the 4 aspects of classroom culture (Relating, Talking, Constructing, Celebrating).

A reasoning-friendly classroom culture

Here is a selection of features that might begin to shape the emotional climate of your classroom to encourage reasoning.

The diagram has 4 sections:

  • Top – strategies you could build into the way you teach to stimulate reasoning;
  • Right – indications of the sort of language you might use to stimulate reasoning;
  • Bottom – ways in which you might celebrate / praise students’ use of reasoning;
  • Left – things that you need to enable students to do.

Take time to download the diagram and consider which of these aspects are already a regular feature in your classroom, and which could easily be introduced to make the culture even more reasoning-friendly.

Blending these ideas

Ask yourself:

How might you harness some or more of the ideas in the reasoning-friendly culture diagram . . .

 

 

 

to ready your classroom for building your students’ reasoning skills

As you begin to explore the teaching ideas for each phase of development, keep these big 4 ideas in mind. Ask yourself – how might you:

  1. Slow the pace of lessons to ensure there is enough time for students to reason for themselves;

  2. Enable and encourage talk about reasoning to ensure students understand the how and why of reasoning;

  3. Design activities that exercise and develop students’ reasoning skills, and ensure they reflect on how it is developing;

  4. Display, praise and reward the use and growth of reasoning.

 

And if you do embed these 4 big ideas . . .

A quick look back to progression in classroom culture.

You have met this diagram in various formats during Phase 1, Playing the Learning Power Game. It charts progression in the 4 aspects of classroom culture (Relating, Talking, Constructing and Celebrating) from a teacher-focused classroom culture at the bottom to a fully-fledged learning-focused culture at the top.

If you are able to keep these 4 big ideas above in mind and embed them in your classroom culture, you will see that your classroom culture is around the fourth row, well on the way to being learning-friendly.

Now take a look at the Learning Chart sections where you will find plenty of ideas to try.

 

Continue Reading

Section 1: Reasoning and how it develops

1a) What do we mean by Reasoning?

Reasoning is the kind of logical, analytical, explicit disciplined thinking that schools often focus on (sometimes to the exclusion of some of the other elements). There is a lot of interest at the moment in ways of teaching thinking, and there are many materials for teaching thinking on the market. In BLP, such ‘Show your working’ kinds of thinking are a very important part of the good learner’s toolkit, but they are not the be-all and end-all of learning. In fact, research suggests that secondary schools have not been very successful at developing students’ ability to think logically in real life.

It turns out to be quite difficult to free any kind of thinking or learning skill from its ties to the particular setting and subject matter in which it was originally practised.

Nevertheless, being able to construct logical arguments or make practical use of Venn diagrams, for example, is very useful, and good learners need practice at using such tools in the context of their real-life concerns.

Extract from Building Learning Power. Guy Claxton 2002

1b) What does being a good Reasoner involve?

A well formed Reasoning habit involves being ready, willing, and able to:

  • Resist jumping to conclusions
  • Seek justifiable evidence to shape sound, well-honed arguments.
  • Scrutinise your assumptions
  • Seek evidence and counter evidence, look for false steps and carefully draw conclusions.
  • Remain suspicious, doubting and self-doubting in order to avoid unwarranted certainty.
  • Convey your logical thinking clearly, through dialogue, symbols, analogies, prose and pictures.

So, at a less abstract level, students need to learn the inclination to resist impulsive responses; to respond logically and thoughtfully; to apply logic by explaining, justifying and, ultimately, proving what they think; to utilise a range of reasoning tools; and to develop strategies for presenting their reasoning to others persuasively. When looked at from these diverse angles growing reasoning moves well beyond encouraging a student to ‘think it through’.

The Reasoning grid below takes account of the constituent parts of building the habit of Reasoning

Our progression grid for Reasoning has 5 components:

Reasoning grid may 2016 Reasoning grid_Colour

 

Download grid as a pdf

1c) Unpicking the columns; what contributes to a readiness to Reason?

The grid columns are things that might combine to make up the skills and attitudes of a Reasoner.

Reasoning grid may 2016 Reasoning grid_ColourOverview of the grid

Reasoning is about disciplined thinking, making logical arguments and backing them up with proof. It’s a complex process in itself as well as in its development. The first column shows how our disposition or inclination to reason might develop; how this manifests itself from using trial and error thinking to high-level meta-reasoning (thinking about how we reason). Column two shows how we might talk about these phases and column three shows what we might actually do when we apply the disposition in each phase of growth. Column four suggests the sort of reasoning tools we would be using and column five suggests how we might present our reasoning to others.

Reasoning grid may 2016 Reasoning grid_Page_03Frames of mind

How we are disposed to reason

The first column shows a broad sweep of our dispositions to reason. At first, we might approach reasoning in a haphazard way using a trial and error frame of mind. We move on to asking questions and making propositions. what’s this really about? Is this because? What do I know about this? We might move on to seeking evidence to try to justify or prove our point and then on again to wanting to make even more sure of our evidence and maybe question our original assumptions. Finally, at the Embodies phase we are able to reason about reasoning and how we can improve the process. So the range moves from being impulsive to being super cautious, where not getting thinking wrong is a huge part of getting it right.

Reasoning grid may 2016 Reasoning grid_Page_04Self-talk

The voice of self-awareness

Self-talk is what we say to ourselves as we learn. The statements here capture what someone in each phase of the grid would be thinking. Students may use some of these phrases when talking with you, or in writing from time to time, but mostly self-talk goes on inside their heads. We have shown a small flavour of self-talk thoughts that teachers can encourage students to imitate. All such self-talk is important in building a Reasoning habit.

 

 

 

Reasoning grid may 2016 Reasoning grid_Page_05Applying reasoning

What we do when we reason

In the first phase of reasoning, we might be able to describe or explain what we are thinking but not why we are thinking in this way. Later we can justify and say why we are thinking something but we aren’t able to prove it. We might though be able to convince others of our point. Later we are able to prove our thinking through solid evidence. One might think that would be enough but good reasoners go further to check for false steps and check their original assumptions. And finally, the super reasoner knows about and seeks to avoid common traps in logic and fallacious arguments.

 

 

Reasoning grid may 2016 Reasoning grid_Page_06Reasoning tools

The thinking tools we use in reasoning.

In the first phases of reasoning, we might just guess at things or compare and contrast things. Is this like that? How is this different from that? Later we might speculate about things, try to spot patterns, visualise next steps or solutions. In the next phase, we use deductive reasoning where we apply a general rule to specific problems. In the later phases, we evaluate pros and cons and look for alternative solutions. And in the final phase, we try to provoke new ways of thinking about things.

If you are interested in a brief glance at different types of reasoning refer to 6) Types of Reasoning.

 

Reasoning grid may 2016 Reasoning grid_Page_07Presenting Reasoning

Ways of showing our reasoning

The point of reasoning is not merely to convince ourselves, but to convince others of our thinking. This applies to a mathematical proof as much as it does to a philosophical argument or an analysis of a newspaper column. We might start simply by telling what we did and maybe why we did this. We move forward to being able to show how we worked something out and later show this through symbols and diagrams as well as words. Lastly, we are able to make convincing presentations of our views, arguments and proofs in terms that would suit any audience.

Reasoning within an argument gives the rationale behind why one choice, for example, should be selected over another. The main two types of reasoning are:

  • Deductive Reasoning: starting from the general rule and moving to specifics.
  • Inductive Reasoning: starting from specifics and deriving a general rule.

And other types that are variants on deductive or inductive reasoning are:

  • Abduction: the process of creating explanatory hypotheses.
  • Backwards Reasoning: Start from what you want and work back.
  • Butterfly Logic: How people often argue.
  • Analogical Reasoning: relating things to novel other situations.
  • Cause-and-Effect Reasoning: showing causes and resulting effect.
  • Cause-to-Effects Reasoning: starting from the cause and going forward.
  • Effects-to-Cause Reasoning: starting from the effect and working backward.
  • Comparative Reasoning: comparing one thing against another.
  • Conditional Reasoning: using if…then…
  • Criteria Reasoning: comparing against established criteria.
  • Decompositional Reasoning: understand the parts to understand the whole.
  • Exemplar Reasoning: using an example.
  • Modal Logic: arguing about necessity and possibility.
  • Pros-vs-cons Reasoning: using arguments both for and against a case.
  • Residue Reasoning: Removing first what is not logical.
  • Set-based Reasoning: based on categories and membership relationships.
  • Systemic Reasoning: the whole is greater than the sum of its parts.
  • Syllogistic Reasoning: drawing conclusions from premises.
  • Traditional Logic: assuming premises are correct.

Note that these are not all mutually exclusive methods and several give different lenses onto overlapping areas. In classical argument, for example, all arguments are framed as either inductive or deductive.

To find out more, go to
https://changingminds.org

If you are interested in a brief glance at different types of reasoning click here

What do you think?

  • What have you learned about Reasoning from these descriptions?
  • What have you had confirmed?
  • What surprised you?
  • How have your views changed?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • Any ideas for practical classroom experiments that these descriptions have triggered
  • Which column your students are most secure in.

 

1d) Unpicking the rows; getting better at Reasoning

Of course, the development of Reasoning doesn’t grow neatly up each column or evenly across the phases in the grid. The five broad phases of dispositional growth (purple – orange) are affective ways in which people may be inclined to behave: we call this inclination ‘mindedness’.

Here is our interpretation of how Reasoning might grow.

Reasoning grid may 2016 Reasoning grid_Colour

Meaning behind the phases

The phases are drawn from Bloom’s taxonomy of the affective domain.

Phase ‘Receives’ (purple) is about doing something because you are told or expected to.

Phase ‘Responds’ (blue) is about gaining interest and doing things more willingly.

Phase ‘Values’ (green) is a key phase since the student now sees the value of behaving in this way. It’s a win for them; to behave like this is in their interest. It’s in this phase that the behaviour becomes more secure.

Phase ‘Organises’ (yellow) is the phase in which the student capitalises on this ‘in their interest’ behaviour and gets themselves organised to use it positively.

Phase ‘Embodies’ (orange), known as ‘characterised’ in the original taxonomy. In this phase, the student has made this behaviour their own. It has become part of their character; they can’t not do it and they have become highly skilled in doing it.

We urge you to see this progression as long term. Some phases will take years for people to work through; some will never be worked through. None of the phases are inevitable. There is a lifetime of development captured here. Nevertheless, the role of a teacher or parent should surely be to encourage and enable this journey.

 

Lacks: Minded to use what they think they know

Reasoning grid may 2016 Reasoning grid_Page_13In this ‘Lacks’ (grey) phase, students talk about what they know. They don’t consider having to prove or justify what they say, in their view they just ‘know stuff’. They probably have little cause to have to explain why they think something and their quick thinking based on limited experiences means that they often jump to conclusions. There are many people who don’t get far from this starting point or fall back to it.

Receives: Minded to say why.

Reasoning grid may 2016 Reasoning grid_Page_12

 

In the Receives (purple) phase, pupils become more curious about things. They may enjoy talking about (describing) what they are thinking but as yet find it hard to explain why they think it. ‘Describes’ is seen as a step 1 in reasoning, while ‘Explaining’…offering some reasons for what they did (correct or incorrect) is seen as step 2. They will enjoy the challenge of comparing and contrasting things or guessing or estimating how things might be. Precision isn’t yet part of their bag.

Responds: Minded to form a line of argument.

Reasoning grid may 2016 Reasoning grid_Page_11

In the Responds (blue) phase, students have more confidence in their reasoning although they may not be correct. In ‘convincing’ they may use the words ‘I reckon’ or ‘without-doubt’. They are also then able to justify forming a correct logical chain of argument. They use words like ‘because’ or ‘therefore’ or ‘and so’.

Values: Minded to prove a point or argument

Reasoning grid may 2016 Reasoning grid_Page_10

In the Values (green) phase, students understand the importance of needing to show how they worked something out. Now they can give a watertight argument based on generalisations (deductive reasoning). There is an assumption at this phase that students can communicate their solutions in a written form

Organises: Minded to check and counter check for accuracy/logic

Reasoning grid may 2016 Reasoning grid_Page_09

In the Organises (yellow) phase Reasoning has become a skilful habit. By this stage proofs have been made but then thinking begins again…’is this proof good enough?’, Is there a flaw in this argument that I haven’t spotted? Is there any counter evidence I need to consider? This is a highly cautious phase.

Embodies: Minded to be a meta reasoner

Reasoning grid may 2016 Reasoning grid_Page_08

In the Embodies (orange) phase, it’s fair to say that few people make it that far. High-level Reasoning is much more complex than we have been able to indicate here but in essence, this phase is about thinking deeply about the reasoning or logic process itself and how it might be improved. Such people are highly skilled in making and presenting complex logical arguments in a way that many audiences will understand.

What do you think?

  • What has struck you about the act of Reasoning having read the descriptions above?
  • Which phase do you operate in?
  • What makes you say that?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • What you might do to assist your students to make headway in their Reasoning behaviour.
  • Any practical ideas the text has triggered.

 

Preparation for the Learning Team meeting

Where are my pupils now?

  • Take a look at the Reasoning progression chart in your Learning Diary or
  • Download grid to colour in here
  • Colour in the cells where you think your students are secure.
  • Some will barely be on the chart while others may be quite a way up. Neat straight lines of secure behaviours are rare. But looking at your students in this way should give you an idea of what you need to work on.
  • Draw a red line across the chart to denote where you think most of the school’s students could and should reach by the time they leave.
  • Please take the results of these tasks with you to the Professional Learning Team session shown in Section 4
Continue Reading

Section 4: Team reflection and planning

Session agenda

1. Session objectives

What do we want to achieve? ( 5 mins)

2. Sharing classroom experiments

How did our experiments go? ( 20 mins)

Share

  • the changes in practice you tried
  • how students reacted
  • what you learned
  • what next as a result

Probe

  • what was getting in the way?
  • what seemed difficult?
  • what would make it easier?
  • what made it work particularly well?
  • why it was successful?
  • changes in your behaviour

Talk about impact

  • Avoidance of…..
  • Improvements in……
  • Increases in…….
  • Little of no changes in…

3. Recapping on-line materials

What did we think of the materials? ( 15 mins)

Reactions to

  • The Planning progression grid
  • Where students are secure
  • Where students could be secure when they leave our school
  • Classroom culture ideas
  • Activities and talk ideas

4. Planning what to do

What do we need to do next? ( 10 mins )

Decide

  • Which ideas should we all adopt as a school strategy?
  • How the progression of Planning should be built across the school. ie how the phases of Planning might play out against key stages and even year groups.

5. Personal action planning

What am I going to do? (20 mins )

5a.Consider

  •  how you want your pupils to improve/develop/enhance their approach to Planning?
  •  what you are going to do to bring this about?
  • How you want to consolidate/develop your classroom culture for planning?
  • What you are going to do to bring this about?
  • develop your enquiry question.

Think of it like this…

If I do  XXXX will it improve/develop/enhance YYYY

This is the crunch question. Your pupils are unlikely to change unless you change!

Capture your learning enquiry as a question

Developing-an-enquiry-question-Planning

Developing-an-enquiry-question-Planning.pdf

5b.Put a short enquiry plan together

Personal Action Plan-Planning

Personal-Action-Plan-Planning.pdf

5c.Discuss which of these possible impacts on students have been observed;

Purple (Show me. Tell me)

  • prepared to follow a given plan of action
  • willingness to work towards given goals
  • is able to talk about what they have to achieve (of a given goal)

Blue (I’ll try)

  • increased inclination to think before taking action
  • increased frequency of talking about what needs to be done
  • preparedness to set their own goals

Green (I see why)

  • use of a wider range of planning / organising tools
  • realisation that planning leads to successful outcomes
  • greater inclination to monitor how their plan is progressing against criteria
  • shows a willingness to amend plans to fit new circumstances

Yellow (I’ll make sure I do)

  • their plans take account of possible setbacks
  • are able to use a range of planning tools to help streamline the planning process
  • increasing skill in setting their own goals, success criteria and milestones

6. Evaluate team session

How did we do as a team? ( 5 mins )

  • Did we achieve our objectives?
  • Are we comfortable with what we are trying to achieve?
  • Any concerns at this point?
  • Next meeting date and time.
Continue Reading

Section 3: Blending Planning with content

So far, you have:

  • Looked at your students through the lens of the Planning learning chart
  • Gained a sense of what becoming better at Planning looks like
  • Explored a range of ideas and activities that will help to engage students with Planning

Now we look closely at how to blend improving students’ planning into the content you have to teach.

A. The principles behind any learning powered lesson

B. Big questions to ask about lesson design

C. Lesson planning in action…an exemplar planning focused task

Learning habits form through use and practice, but desirable habits survive and flourish better if students are aware of them, realise their value and strive to improve them. The curriculum through its lessons provides the rich and varied occasions for exercising learning habits.

A. The principles behind any learning powered lesson

Think of yourself as a learning power coach, helping your students to help themselves to develop their learning habits. Hence your lessons are much more likely to contain challenges and activities that get your students thinking and learning for themselves. You encourage students to explore challenging questions, problems or assertions and become observers of their own learning. You step back from telling and heavy scaffolding and instead try to mobilise your students’ learning behaviours. You are organising learning to let them take the strain.

Open Me

The SIX principles that lie behind teaching for learning power

1: Visible learning…Surfacing learning

You make it clear to students which learning habits and processes they are using. You try to make every aspect of the learning process as visible as possible through the language you use and through the words and images you display on the walls.

For example: 

Praise, display and recognise.

Key ideas for encouraging students to value the ability to think ahead.

  • Praise any ‘thinking ahead’ behaviour.
  • Praise any resistance to being impulsive.
  • Wall display a simple planning sheet/tool
  • Talk with students about planning the course of the day
  • Prompt students to think about what they might do next
  • Review how students’ plans have gone

2: Dual focus teaching…blending content and process

You design activities that combine the dual objectives of ‘what’ will be learned and ‘how’ it will be learned. You make sure students know that the content they are learning is a way of giving their minds a useful workout. (The content is the vehicle for learning)

For example: 

‘What will it look like when it’s finished?’ (WWILLWIF)

Image result for begin with the end in mind

  • Set a task — physical, dramatic, written, practical, spoken, visual — that has clear parameters but which is open-ended.
  • Make WWILLWIF the regular precursor to any action.
  • Ask students to determine WWILLWIF for themselves in conjunction with others.
  • Help them to visualise this in an appropriate form.

3: Emotional engagement…Capturing attention

Your lessons are designed to intrigue your students. Students don’t put in the effort unless their energy and attention are captured by what they are doing. You capture your students’ emotional engagement by giving them more of a stake in the process of learning.

For example:

A Thinking Routine. How long will it take ?

Image result for how long will it take

Get into the habit of asking students ‘how long do you think it will take ?’

This requires students to think about the task(s) ahead, think what may or may not be tricky, question whether what they are attempting is realistic and manageable, and stops them ‘doing it’ and makes them ‘think about doing it’.

 

4: Handling uncertainty…Challenge

You have realised from your own life that what is engaging tends to be what is challenging. Since you see education as a preparation for a learning life, you help students to learn how to handle increasing degrees of complexity and uncertainty.

For example:

Challenge plan

Enable students to create their own plans for seeking and engaging with challenge:

  • What’s the goal?
  • What are the success criteria?
  • What is the timeframe?
  • Gather information about the tasks
  • Link new information to what I already know
  • Where am I expecting difficulties – blocks and obstacles?
  • Are there any dependencies? If this….then that….
  • Use the expert knowledge of others to help distil and refine my ideas
  • Review where I’ve got to and check my thinking against the original success criteria
  • Evaluate emerging outcomes against my expectations
  • Amend the plan or goal if necessary

5: Relationships…Working together

Learning is both a sociable and a solitary activity, and you offer your students opportunities to experience both. You develop interdependent learners who know how to handle themselves in collaborative groups and able to move around in the social space of learning to best effect.

For example:

Planning together

    •  Set students the challenge of organising, for example, a Christmas Party for the elderly – ask them to consider  the features that they will need to take into consideration?

 

    • Suggest they divide the tasks into critical areas – Timing… Invitations… Refreshments…Entertainment… Publicity… Health and Safety… Transport… with a separate group to organise each area. Groups send envoys to the other groups to ensure all the areas meld together.  Do not provide the scaffolding
  • Distil the results as a timeline with allocated responsibilities.

6: Reflection and responsibility…Taking charge

You understand that students have to learn how to manage and organise their own learning and that the way to do this is by giving them increasingly demanding opportunities to do so.   You orchestrate students taking charge of their learning by expecting them to plan what they do, distil meaning from it, and revise it accordingly.

For example:

Monitoring planning

Use Learning Mats at the start of this process to prompt the use of and reflection on planning.

Learning about Planning

Learning-about-Planning.pdf

A checklist for lesson planning based on these six principles.

Does the lesson plan:

  • Make it clear to students which learning behaviours are being activated?
  • Match and blend the learning behaviour with content?
  • Include a tactic to captivate students’ attention?
  • Have sufficiently challenging learning activities to sustain interest for all?
  • Offer choice on how students could interact on these tasks?
  • Embed aspects of planning, reflecting and revising for content and process?

What do you think?

  • Which of these six principles are a regular feature of your planning?
  • What do you make of principle 2? Is it the most tricky of the six? The following section B is mostly about this aspect of planning.
  • Look at the checklist in the green box above this one: Do your lesson plans capture these six aspects of an effective learning experience?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • Which of the six principles might need to be given greater prominence in your planning.

 

B.   Big questions to ask about lesson design.

Skim read or leave this section if you have met it in other units because… the section applies to any learning behaviour. i.e. not specific to Planning.

What we teach and how we teach it (the enacted curriculum) are intertwined and offer teachers a lot of freedom. It is here that you can start applying a learning power filter and deploy a unique combination of content and learning tasks.

Open Me

Prelude

In conventional lessons where the teacher remains the focus of attention and the initiator of all activity, and where the epistemic dimension (the conditions for acquiring knowledge) is not acknowledged, students gain habits of compliance and dependence, rather than curiosity and self-reliance.

In developing learning power, teachers are making conscious choices about which habits to introduce and stretch and how best to couple these with content so that lessons become more interesting and challenging. Through such overt coupling of content and specific types of process, students come to know, understand and take control of their learning behaviours – they knowingly use and develop the whole range of learning behaviours.

All lessons function on two levels, they have twin intentions. On the one hand there is content to be acquired, and on the other there are learning behaviours to be exercised in pursuit of this content. The factor that differentiates a standard lesson that effectively ‘delivers the content’ from a learning powered lesson is that the teacher has to think, in advance, about:

  • the learning behaviours that are necessary for successful content acquisition;
  • the design of activities /tasks that will stimulate these behaviours;
  • how learners could reflect on and evaluate their use of these behaviours.

In designing such lessons you have to dare to think differently and flip round your usual lesson design thinking.

  A turn-around in lesson design

Think in two dimensions at once – the content dimension and the learning behaviour dimension. It means turning your thinking around – from teaching to learning.

Or put another way

Think to yourself;

  • what content?
  • using which learning behaviour(s)?
  • via an activity to stretch both?

 

Lesson design questions… one by one

Here the general rules of lesson design have been related to the learning behaviour…planning.

Stage 1. What content do students need to learn?

What content has to be learned? …..Think outcomes.

  • Use standard lesson planning tools:
    • What are students going to be able to do/learn?…think objectives
    • How will they know if they been successful?… think success criteria
  • While keeping an obvious eye on
    • What do they already know?….think previous learning.

 

Stage 2. How will they best learn it?

Using which learning behaviours?

This is the new bit 

Not the usual second step but nonetheless a vital second step where the aim is to weave content acquisition with learning behaviours. The content is the vehicle for exercising the learning behaviours and the learning behaviours accelerate the content acquisition.

Using which learning behaviours?…Think types of learning behaviours

  • Which learning behaviour(s) will help these students get closer to understanding this content?…think learning behaviour charts.
  • Which aspect of, say, planning, lends itself to achieving these outcomes?…think progression columns.
  • How skilled are these students in using this learning behaviour …think progression phases/rows

Say something like this to yourself .…My students need to achieve xxx. At this stage we could get closer to this content by using planning. Most of my students are able to use xxx phase (e.g. respond/blue) planning approaches confidently.

Stage 3. What type of task/activity will stretch the learning?

Which type of task…Think types of task. 

Pick up your thinking from stage 2; 

My students need to achieve xxx. At this stage we could get closer to this content by using planning. Most of my students would be able to use xxx phase (e.g. blue/responds phase) planning approaches confidently.

And now think about the sort of task/activity you might develop/design so as to:

    • orchestrate a problem-solving activity to enable students’ understanding of xyz content without telling them;
    • intrigue them with something that is open to several interpretations;
    • stimulate their curiosity;
    • grab their attention…visually and aurally;
    • allow them to stay stuck before I ask them how they are thinking;
    • offer as a nudge to get them thinking differently that doesn’t give the answer away;
    • leave it as a problem hanging in the air to which we will return later;
  • make links between the challenge, and what and how we are learning in this lesson.

The challenge isn’t about the inherent complexity of the subject matter but about how the content is orchestrated to encourage students to use their learning habits to resource their solution.

Think…what/how much information/content do I need to give/reveal? At what point? In what form? To what end?

Say something like this to yourself .

  • my students need to achieve xxx.
  • at this point we could get closer to this content by using planning.
  • most of my students are able to use xxx phase (e.g. respond/blue phase) planning approaches confidently.
  • What type of task would stretch their planning but assist them with the content…without me just telling them!

 

 

To summarise…the heart of the lesson


It’s the question ‘using which learning behaviours?’ that causes you to think differently about the lesson planning.

  • You ask – as always – what are the anticipated objectives/intentions?
  • The verbs in your resulting objectives will give you clues about the types of task/methodology that will get students there and the sorts of learning behaviours your students will need to contribute to this learning endeavour.

You are designing the task in a way that requires students to contribute their learning ‘powers’ / behaviours. The tasks you design will hook into their learning ‘powers’ and help them to improve them.

Say something like this to yourself:

I am going to think content, learning behaviour and task together:

  • Planning will help students to better access the content;
  • The aspect of planning (column) and phase (row) that would fit best is (for example) “Articulate what needs to be done, in a sensible order and the resources needed” (Planning Actions column, Blue/Responds phase).
  • The type of task/activity that would best stretch both content and learning behaviour, intrigue, challenge, bring people together and give responsibility to students is………
  • Think….what information do I need to reveal/give, in what form, at what point, and what do I want students to do with it?

What do you think?

  • What strikes you about this way of planning with learning behaviours in mind?
  • Where are the potential stumbling blocks?
  • How will you decide which learning behaviour(s) you are going to foreground in your objectives?

Consider a lesson you are about to teach…Little_r

  • What is the content?
  • Which learning behaviour(s), if missing, would make accessing the content very difficult / impossible?
  • How could you blend reference to this learning behaviour(s) into the learning objectives?
  • Can you design a task that will help students to access the content and exercise the key learning behaviour(s) you have identified?

 

 

C. Lesson planning in action – an exemplar, planning focused, task.

How do we design lessons that stretch Planning and assist students to approach the content more productively? We cover this in four ways:

  • 1 offers a reminder about the importance of planning
  • 2 shows the phases of a lesson where Planning and learning to plan is the driving behaviour;
  • 3 considers the simple lesson plan template that can be used for any lesson and distils the Planning lesson into this format;

Open Me

 

1. A reminder about planning

Planning is the ability to take a strategic overview of your learning and make sensible decisions. It’s a much bigger idea than… ‘what needs to be done in what order’. It means:

  • taking stock of the problem and the parameters within which you must work
  • assessing the available resources, both inner and outer, and deciding which you think are going to be needed
  • making an estimate of the time learning will take, and the competing priorities that have to be delayed or sacrificed
  • imagining a route map for the learning, anticipating hurdles and problems that may arise alongside

Good learners like to take the responsibility for planning and organising their learning. They welcome opportunities to decide when, where, and how they will learn. Research shows that people who can make a reasonable estimate of how long a task will take are more likely to finish on time and produce better work.

Planning your own learning is a sophisticated task. It involves a personal, silent assessment of your learning skills (‘What can I feasibly achieve? What am I capable of doing? What resources would bolster my chances of success?’). The more timid, less confident or lower achieving students may find such planning a daunting prospect. Introducing and requiring students to work learning out for themselves will take time and careful planning on the part the teacher. When looked at from these diverse angles growing planning mindsets moves well beyond encouraging a student to ‘think ahead’

2. Planning used in a lesson.

The lesson below uses follows a fairly traditional pattern;

  • linking to prior learning;
  • reminders about ways of doing things;
  • warm-up tasks;
  • a main activity;
  • reflecting on the process.

The content of the lesson is about using a telescope to take pictures of Mars. Although this may sound sophisticated it is a real possibility for students. The Faulkes Telescopes are available for schools to book to use them.

The Faulkes Telescope Project offers schools free use of two astronomical telescopes (one in Hawaii and one in Australia, so the telescopes have night sky to observe during the UK’s school hours). The telescopes can be controlled in real time over the Internet using a web browser.

The project is based in the School of Physics and Astronomy at Cardiff University, and is run by Dr Paul Roche; Dr Sarah Roberts is the project’s education officer. Extensive further information can be found at www.faulkes-telescope.com

However the lesson doesn’t require the students to be able to do this for real since the information cards used in the lesson offer all the information necessary for this level of planning i.e. it is heavily scaffolded in order to reinforce  critical planning skills. Students will need several opportunities of this type in order to reinforce such behaviours before they are likely to be able to plan accurately for themselves.

Overview of lesson plan:

Episode 1 – An outline plan of the lesson

 

What is happening here?

This brief introduction simply sets the scene for the learning opportunity. The importance a thinking ahead, having a plan for the lesson, and reminding learners of previous learning show from the start how planning is brought into practical use in the classroom.

 

Episode 2 – features of managing your own learning

What is happening here?

This 5 minute slot is simply to help students recall previous learning and experience of being a self-regulating learner. Since the class has been engaged in something of a space theme the relevant  information is captured on moon shapes circulating around a reflective planet. Asking students to try and remember the terms and distil what they mean to no more than 5 words is quite a big ask. But their whiteboard explanations will enable you to get a feel for where they are with understanding the ideas of reflection and self-regulation.

Episode 3 – Warm up activity…mirroring

What is happening here?

This warm up activity is included simply to help students switch into using the main behaviours to be used in the lesson i.e. activated or provoked by the lesson/task design. Of course you could use quite different ideas than teeth cleaning and preparing a meal for an astronaut, but the idea is to start the planning mindset going. Note too that students are encouraged to review what they have planned. So however inconsequential something appears to be it’s a good idea to review action!

Episode 4- Seven reminders about effective planning.

What is happening here?

Before the activity itself this teacher decided to remind students of the planning behaviours they had been working on and learning about in previous sessions. Although we have shown these on the screen here it’s best not to reveal them to students until after they have done their own thinking. So the question about planning behaviours is posed and students think back to the previous activity and venture ideas. One of the students might do this using a flip chart or similar. Now it’s time for the big reveal when the teacher shows the list one at a time. It’s a good idea to show this list without numbers and jumbled up so that you can ask students to un-jumble to list and put it into a workable order.. There’s a lot of link making, noticing and reasoning going on here.

Episode 5- In search of a planet

What is happening here?

  • Now, after some throat clearing and reminders we come to the main activity of the lesson… that of putting a plan together. This lesson turns on the planning cards and the outline plan.
  • Planning cards. Each group of four students will require a set of these cards which they should then distribute equally amongst them. There are success criteria, information and decision cards and unless you have used this idea before you will need to explain the purpose or function of each card. You could of course make this a slightly more difficult task by removing the function label of the card. Download these resource cards below and you will quickly see how they work
  • Planning sheet. Each group will need one sheet which provides more scaffolding for the task. The task is basically to arrange the cards in a relevant order on the planning sheet one they have decided their goals, sorted out which information is relevant and made some decisions. You can download the Planning sheets below. 

After about 20 minutes planning time ask students to gallery their plans and then, as a group look for and explore similarities and differences. This leads into the next episode of the lesson.

Episode 6- Being adaptable

What is happening here?

In this interlude we begin to consider checking and possibly revising the plans. There are 3 views of a telescope to be revealed on the screen and you might ask students to work in pairs and try to draw what they see and work out what it might be. Of course this isn’t a drawing exercise but rather through sketching and thinking about something we come to understand more about it. Understanding more may cause us to change our mind about what it is or what’s going on. So this exercise is simply warming students up into thinking about their previous plans and whether after looking at them carefully they may want to amend them. Notice here there is no hint of the plans being shown up as wrong or incorrect but that editing, amending, reshaping etc. is all part and parcel of planning

Episode 7- Revising your plans

What is happening here?

With the benefit of the previous episode invite students to relook at their plans and make any necessary amends.

Episode 8- Reflecting on planning

What is happening here?

And finally the lesson might conclude with a short session focussing on students evaluating their planning behaviours. Pose questions such as ‘What have you found out about planning? What was easy or tricky about it? What was the benefit of reviewing your plans?’ You might use the ubiquitous Think Pair Share here but make sure the questions are thought through alone before students share their ideas with others. This is about beginning to understand what you think by articulating it and then trying it out on someone else. The class might come up with a suitable consensus worthy of public display.

Resources to download

Please find below the PPt presentation used to scaffold the lesson for students. Notes are given under each slide.

In-search-of-a-planet_Presentation

Please find below the PPt presentation of the pictures you have been looking at above which show how the lesson is constructed.

Lesson plan_In-search-of-a-planet

Please find below all the paper resources you need for the lesson…planning cards, planning sheet and sky-maps

What do you think?

  • Can you think of a curriculum-related subject that might be suitable for this sort of planning treatment? i.e. information cards. decision cards etc

Make a note of…Little_r

  • Which subject you might try this with, and how could you adapt it to make it easier or more demanding?

3 Using a lesson plan template to distil this lesson.

There are hundreds of lesson plan formats but we have used one that is a simple streamlined useable tool that includes:

  • What you do (teacher action);
  • What students do (student action);
  • What the learning behaviours being called upon are (learning behaviours);
  • What you say (learning talk) to nudge the learning behaviour along.

The format is divided into episodes to show the change of purpose, action and use of learning behaviour across the course of the lesson. The thing that will drive the lesson is your talk…how much you say, when you choose to say it, the tone and register you use, the ‘could be’ nature of it, whether you are in telling or coaching mode.

Download a blank lesson plan as a MS Word document: Lesson Planning Grid [.DOC 33KB]

If we now populate the template with the episodes explored in section 2 above, we get the completed lesson plan. . .

 

What do you think?

  • What are your first reactions to this lesson plan template?
  • Does planning for four aspects – teacher action, student action, learning behaviours, teacher talk – seem useful?
  • How does sequencing the lesson as ‘episodes’ help or hinder planning?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • The extent to which your existing planning template enables you to think about lessons in this way.
  • What you would like / need to add to it.
Continue Reading

Section 2: Building Planning-friendly classroom cultures

Teachers as habit formers

As teachers we are in the habit-forming business. What we say, what we display on classroom walls, what we celebrate, praise or dismiss, what we model or how we design learning activities will all influence the ways in which students learn, perform and behave. Classroom cultures have a huge influence on students’ learning as you will remember from Playing the Learning Power Game.

Creating a Planning-friendly classroom culture

As a result of section 1 of this module . . .

You have learned about Planning and how it grows. You have met the planning progression chart (opposite) and considered the skills that your students have already mastered and those that might need some further attention.

This section offers a catalogue of teaching ideas, organised in relation to the phases of development in the progression chart, that you can use to sharpen your students’ planning skills.

But before you dip into the catalogue, let’s take a moment to consider whether your existing classroom culture is sufficiently planning-friendly to allow students’ planning skills to flourish and develop.

 

 

Is your classroom culture ready for Planning?

Let’s go back to a diagram you may have met in the latter stages of Phase 1 Playing the Learning Power Game.

It is a reminder of what a planning-friendly classroom culture looks like in terms of the 4 aspects of classroom culture (Relating, Talking, Constructing, Celebrating).

A planning-friendly classroom culture

Here is a selection of features that might begin to shape the emotional climate of your classroom to encourage planning.

The diagram has 4 sections:

  • Top – strategies you could build into the way you teach to stimulate planning;
  • Right – indications of the sort of language you might use to stimulate planning;
  • Bottom – ways in which you might celebrate / praise students’ use of planning;
  • Left – things that you need to enable students to do.

Take time to download the diagram and consider which of these aspects are already a regular feature in your classroom, and which could easily be introduced to make the culture even more planning-friendly.

Blending these ideas

Ask yourself:

How might you harness some or more of the ideas in the planning-friendly culture diagram . . .

 

 

 

to ready your classroom for building your students’ planning skills

As you begin to explore the teaching ideas for each phase of development, keep these big 4 ideas in mind. Ask yourself – how might you:

  1. Slow the pace of lessons to ensure there is enough time for students to plan for themselves;

  2. Enable and encourage talk about planning to ensure students understand the how and why of planning;

  3. Design activities that exercise and develop students’ planning skills, and ensure they reflect on how it is developing;

  4. Display, praise and reward the use and growth of planning.

 

And if you do embed these 4 big ideas . . .

A quick look back to progression in classroom culture.

You have met this diagram in various formats during Phase 1, Playing the Learning Power Game. It charts progression in the 4 aspects of classroom culture (Relating, Talking, Constructing and Celebrating) from a teacher-focused classroom culture at the bottom to a fully-fledged learning-focused culture at the top.

If you are able to keep these 4 big ideas above in mind and embed them in your classroom culture, you will see that your classroom culture is around the fourth row, well on the way to being learning-friendly.

Now take a look at the Learning Chart sections where you will find plenty of ideas to try.

Continue Reading

Section 1: Planning and how it develops

1a) What do we mean by Planning?

Planning is the ability to take a strategic overview of your learning, and make sensible decisions. It means:

  • taking stock of the problem and the parameters within which you must work
  • assessing the available resources, both inner and outer, and deciding which you think are going to be needed
  • making an estimate of the time the learning will take, and the competing priorities that may have to be delayed or sacrificed
  • imagining a route-map for the learning
  • anticipating hurdles or problems that may arise along the way.

Good learners like taking responsibility for planning and organising their learning. They welcome opportunities to decide for themselves when, where, why and how they are going to learn—and to get better at doing so. Research shows, for example, that people who can make a reasonable estimate of how long a task will take are more likely to finish on time, and to do better work.

Extract from Building Learning Power. Guy Claxton 2002

1b) What does being a good Planner involve?

Being able to think ahead isn’t the whole story of Planning. Becoming an effective Planner of your own learning needs you to know something about yourself as a learner; your interests, your needs, your wishes. Training the process of thinking ahead often starts simply by asking students to find the resources they will need to carry out a task. But planning your own learning is a sophisticated task. It involves a personal, silent assessment of your learning skills (‘What can I feasibly achieve? What am I capable of doing? What resources would bolster my chances of success?’) The more timid, less confident or lower achieving students may find such planning a daunting prospect. Introducing and requiring students to work learning out for themselves will take time and careful planning on the part the teacher. When looked at from these diverse angles growing planning moves well beyond encouraging a student to ‘think ahead’

The Planning grid below takes account of the constituent parts of building the habit of Planning. As a grid it is probably one of the most straightforward and even boring! The emphasis we would like to stress is not so much the growing sophistication of a plan but rather the move growing move towards giving students the opportunity and power to plan learning for themselves. Without such habits they will never become independent learners.

Our progression grid for Planning has 6 components:

Planning Grid.xls_2

Download grid as a pdf

1c) Unpicking the columns; what contributes to a readiness to Plan?

The grid columns are things that might combine to make up the skills and attitudes of a Planner.

Planning Grid.xls_2Overview of the grid

Planning is an important aspect of becoming an independent learner. It’s about how we prepare for what we want to learn and the ways we want to do it. Students’ attitude to planning is captured in column two. Without a positive attitude they are unlikely to undertake, let alone perfect, a planning habit, and their attitude can be influenced by how they view themselves as learners. Planning might start out as mere lists in our heads or on paper but as the habit picks up and plans become more complex there are many tools that may be used assist the process. This aspect of planning is picked up in column one. Column four picks up on how students expand and refine goal setting, and the contents of plans themselves are picked up in column five. The final column charts how plans may be monitored and evaluated and how this influences the development of planning over time.

The learning guru Stephen Covey is famous for his: “Start with the end in mind”
Take a closer look at what each column of the grid is about

Planning toolsPlanning Grid.xls_3_Page_1

Tools we might use to help us plan

 

Our planning may simply start in our heads but as it gets more complex we may need tools to help us work out what to do when and which activities are dependent on others being done first. So the progress of planning tools runs from simple lists to spider diagrams and Post its to flow diagrams to spreadsheets and so on. The suggestions don’t give a full array of such tools. You will be familiar with others. The point here is about moving from simple to complex tools.

Attitude to planningPlanning Grid.xls_3_Page_2

How we relate to the process of planning

Attitudes are central to whether we do something willingly or not. Here we capture the journey from following a given plan, because they have been required to do so, to planning being a key part of how a person runs their life. As usual, it’s in the Value phase that the process of planning is beginning to make sense and shown to be worthwhile. This is often largely because students discover that good initial planning can help to save time and inefficiencies in the process of learning itself. But these attitudes are also tied up with how a student views themselves as a learner; whether they think they have the skills to carry through with a plan; whether they are brave enough to set themselves challenging targets. And some students may well make a plan but lack the perseverance or commitment to carry it through. So, helping students to get good at planning is a hearts as well as a minds job.

Self-talkPlanning Grid.xls_3_Page_3

The voice of self-awareness

 

Self-talk is what we say to ourselves as we learn. The statements capture what someone in each phase of the grid would be thinking. Students may use some of these phrases when talking with you, or in writing from time to time, but mostly self-talk goes on inside their heads. We have shown a small flavour of self-talk thoughts that teachers can encourage students to imitate. Some relate to how they feel, others to what they are doing in a phase. All such self-talk is important in building a Planning habit. Helping to develop such talk is a critical part of a teacher’s role.

Setting intentionsPlanning Grid.xls_3_Page_4

Goal setting

This column is about how we become more sophisticated at setting out our end goals. This may start with simple statements about what we want something to look like, a visualisation of something we might be working on. As we come to know ourselves and our intentions we become more skilled in estimating what is possible, what’s realistic within time constraints and how such a view of the end result could be measured/assessed; how you would know whether you have achieved the goal.

Planning ActionsPlanning Grid.xls_3_Page_5

The components of plans

This column captures the sort of things commonly associated with a plan; the actions, the order of things, the timing, the resourcing, the contingencies. These elements of a plan grow to become more sophisticated and accurate over time.

FlexibilityPlanning Grid.xls_3_Page_6

How we monitor and change our plans

The last constituent of Planning has to do with how we keep an eye on a plan as it moves along. Because it takes time to plan, this often triggers a feeling that the plan deserves to be checked as it goes along. Such checking may simply be ‘have I met or will I meet that target/milestone ?’ – i.e. is the plan going to plan? Later, as students become more used to carrying plans through they learn that plans often don’t go smoothly and that they have to be amended as circumstances change. This level of understanding and flexibility begins in the value phase and grows to become meta-evaluation; ‘is this method of planning itself effective? Do I need to tweak the process of planning?’

What do you think?

  • What have you learned about Planning from these descriptions?
  • What have you had confirmed?
  • What surprised you?
  • How have your views changed?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • Any ideas for practical classroom experiments that these descriptions have triggered
  • Which column your students are most secure in.

1d) Unpicking the rows; getting better at Planning.

Of course, the development of Planning does not grow neatly up each column or evenly across the phases in the grid. The five broad phases of dispositional growth (purple – orange) are affective ways in which people may be inclined to behave: we call this inclination ‘mindedness’.

Here is our interpretation of how Planning might grow.

Planning Grid.xls_2

Meaning behind the phases

The phases are drawn from Bloom’s taxonomy of the affective domain.

Phase ‘Receives’ (purple) is about doing something because you are told or expected to.

Phase ‘Responds’ (blue) is about gaining interest and doing things more willingly.

Phase ‘Values’ (green) is a key phase since the student now sees the value of behaving in this way. It’s a win for them; to behave like this is in their interest. It’s in this phase that the behaviour becomes more secure.

Phase ‘Organises’ (yellow) is the phase in which the student capitalises on this ‘in their interest’ behaviour and gets themselves organised to use it positively.

Phase ‘Embodies’ (orange), known as ‘characterised’ in the original taxonomy. In this phase, the student has made this behaviour their own. It has become part of their character; they can’t not do it and they have become highly skilled in doing it.

We urge you to see this progression as long term. Some phases will take years for people to work through; some will never be worked through. None of the phases are inevitable. There is a lifetime of development captured here. Nevertheless, the role of a teacher or parent should surely be to encourage and enable this journey.

Lacks: Minded to just rush into doing things

Planning Grid.xls_4_Page_6

In this ‘Lacks’ (grey) phase, students are simply not aware of the concept of planning. They just get on and do things. There is no forethought to their actions and no organisation to how things are done. They enjoy the spontaneity of what they are doing and may, in some cases, feel constrained by even a rudimentary plan.

Receives: Minded to follow a given plan.

Planning Grid.xls_4_Page_5

In the Receives (purple) phase, students are now using short given plans. They know what a plan is for and like following the steps. They can articulate what they want to achieve (start with the end in mind) and could make a list of what they think they need to do. These are short term plans but solid beginnings have been established.

Responds: Minded to have a sense of short-term purpose.

Planning Grid.xls_4_Page_4

In the Responds (blue) phase, students can now set or describe their own short term goals. (I want to be able to …) They can also decide what needs to be done in order to reach the goal. They can also sequence the actions sensibly and decide what resources might help. Mind maps are likely to help them think things out and they can check how things are going as they work through their plan. This level of planning sophistication is a big step from the receive phase (purple) and this will take time to achieve.

Values: Minded to value the efficiency of Planning

Planning Grid.xls_4_Page_3

In the Values (green) phase, students now realise the value of planning and in particular the time it can save. Their own goals are now much more realistic, they have understood which tasks in a plan are significant and how long they might take. Their planning tools have become more complex or indeed they may have designed their own tools. They also realise that plans aren’t set in stone and may have to be amended to fit changing circumstances.

Organises: Minded to seriously organise longer term plans

Planning Grid.xls_4_Page_2

In the Organises (yellow) phase, Planning has become a skilful well-organised habit. The changes in this phase are about making longer-term plans, building in a range of assessment criteria such as goals, objectives, success criteria and milestones and planning that anticipates possible setbacks. This sophistication may require the use of digital planning tools and has been made possible by relentlessly evaluating and learning from past plans.

Embodies: Minded to cover all eventualities in plans

Planning Grid.xls_4_Page_1

In the Embodies (orange) phase, planning has almost become a way of life. Life planning features highly in this phase but this person also approaches and manages life through a plethora of plans; short-term, long-term, strategic, operational. They use sophisticated planning tools that track the various dependencies within a plan, and there’s always a contingency plan to cover changing circumstances. Few people ever reach this level of planning and indeed some would say it was undesirable.

What do you think?

  • What has struck you about the act of Planning having read the descriptions above?
  • Which phase do you operate in?
  • What makes you say that?

Make a note of…Little_r

  • What you might do to assist your students to make headway in their Planning behaviour.
  • Any practical ideas the text has triggered.

Preparation for the Learning Team meeting

Where are my students now?

  • Take a look at the Planning progression chart in your Learning Diary or
  • Download grid to colour in here
  • Colour in the cells where you think your students are secure.
  • Some will barely be on the chart while others may be quite a way up. Neat straight lines of secure behaviours are rare. But looking at your students in this way should give you an idea of what you need to work on.
  • Draw a red line across the chart to denote where you think most of the school’s students could and should reach by the time they leave.
  • Please take the results of these tasks with you to the Professional Learning Team session shown in Section 4
Continue Reading